Panasonic HDC27H User Manual

Operating Instructions  
Camera-Recorder  
Model No. AJ-  
P
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.  
ENGLISH  
@
F0505T0 -F  
VQT0R10  
Printed in Japan  
Contents  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Remaining battery charge and audio channel level  
and remaining tape displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Displays relating to errors and warnings . . . . . . .51  
Displays relating to time codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Features of the camera unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Features of the VTR unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
Adjusting the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Adjustments and setup using the setting  
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Parts and their functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Power supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Accessory mounting section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Audio function section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Viewfinder section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Shooting (recording)/playback function section . .14  
Warning/status display section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Menu operation section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Time code related section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Adjusting the white balance and black  
balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Adjusting the white balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Adjusting the black balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Setting the electronic shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Shutter modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Registering the shutter speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Setting the shutter mode and speed . . . . . . . . . .58  
Changing the shutter speed and mode selection  
range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Setting the synchro scan 1 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Switching the synchro scan shutter speed  
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Using the Anton/Bauer battery pack . . . . . . . . . .22  
Using the Panasonic battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Using the Sony battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Using the V-mount type battery pack . . . . . . . . . .24  
Using an AC power supply  
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
(When the AJ-B75 AC adapter is used) . . . . . . . .25  
Film tone gamma function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Attaching the lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Adjusting the lens flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Adjusting the white shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Switching the frame frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Variable frame rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Setting the frame rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Adjusting the viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Attaching the viewfinder and  
adjusting its position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Scan reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Setting the scan reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Adjusting the audio level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Manual audio level adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Audio input preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
When attaching a microphone to the viewfinder  
(optional accessory) for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
When attaching a microphone to the main unit for  
use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
When connecting a microphone to the  
MIC IN jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
When connecting a microphone to the  
AUDIO IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
When connecting audio components . . . . . . . . . .38  
Setting the time data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Setting the user bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Setting the time code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Externally locking the time code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Tape management information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
How to use the user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
How to use the scene file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Mounting the unit on a tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Attaching the shoulder strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Adjusting the shoulder pad position . . . . . . . . . .40  
Attaching the rain cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Connecting the extension control unit . . . . . . . .41  
Viewfinder lamp displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
SD memory card operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Formatting the SD memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Saving the data settings on the card . . . . . . . . . .76  
Loading the data saved on the card . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Cassette tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
Scene-to-scene continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Setting the  
lamp displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Viewfinder screen status displays . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Selecting the display items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Display modes and setting change messages . . .48  
Switching the display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Setting the marker displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Setting the camera ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Playback  
(checking what has been recorded) . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Rec review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Color playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Lens RET button functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Other VTR functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
NEWS REC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
RETAKE function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
INTERVAL REC (intermittent recording)  
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
3
Contents (continued)  
Menu operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Basic setting menu operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Displaying sub-menus and deciding on  
<VTR MENUS>  
VTR MAIN MENU screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115  
FUNCTION screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116  
BATTERY/TAPE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
BATTERY SETTING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118  
MONITOR MARKER screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118  
VTR VF INDICATOR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119  
MIC/AUDIO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119  
TC/UB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121  
TIME DATE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
VTR USER MENU SELECT screen . . . . . . . . . .123  
VTR CARD READ/WRITE screen . . . . . . . . . . .123  
VTR INITIALIZE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
DIAGNOSTIC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Setting menu configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Setting menu screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
<FILM (CAM) MENUS>  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1 screen . . . . . . . . . . .93  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 screen . . . . . . . . . . .93  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3 screen . . . . . . . . . . .93  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4 screen . . . . . . . . . . .93  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1  
ROP screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
MATRIX screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
COLOR CORRECTION 1 screen . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
COLOR CORRECTION 2 screen . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
LOW SETTING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
MID SETTING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
HIGH SETTING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
ADDITIONAL DTL1 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
ADDITIONAL DTL2 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
SKIN TONE DTL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
KNEE/LEVEL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
GAMMA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
CAMERA SETTING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
<VTR USER MENU SELECT>  
FUNCTION screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
BATTERY/TAPE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
MONITOR MARKER screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
VTR VF INDICATOR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
MIC/AUDIO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
TC/UB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
Warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126  
Emergency eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Head cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Cleaning inside the viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Phenomena inherent to CCD cameras . . . . . . .129  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
VF DISPLAY screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
VF MARKER screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
VF INDICATOR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
CAMERA ID screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
SHUTTER SPEED screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
SHUTTER SELECT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
!LED screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
CAMERA SW MODE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
SUPER GAIN screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
FRAME MODE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Replacing the backup battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Connectors and signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130  
Inspections prior to shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132  
Preparation for inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132  
Inspecting the camera unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132  
Inspecting the viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133  
Inspecting the aperture and zoom functions . . .134  
Inspecting the VTR unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3  
CAM CARD READ/WRITE screen . . . . . . . . . . .107  
CAM CARD R/W SELECT screen . . . . . . . . . . .107  
LENS FILE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
LENS FILE (CARD R/W) screen . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
GENLOCK/IRIS screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
LENS ADJ screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 1 screen . .110  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 2 screen . .110  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 3 screen . .110  
BLACK SHADING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
WHITE SHADING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
FLARE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
COLORIMETRY screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
INITIALIZE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
DIAGNOSTIC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
EVALUATION screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
OPTION screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
4
Introduction  
The AJ-HDC27H is a camera-recorder that supports  
the SMPTE-296M 1280a720 scanning standard.  
Integrated in this single unit are an HD color video  
camera featuring a 1-million pixel IT-CCD unit with on-  
chip lens as the pickup device, and a DVCPRO HD  
format VTR incorporating the latest compression  
technology.  
The camera unit supports a variable frame function  
and film tone gamma function, and it also supports the  
Ultra Prime lenses for 35 mm film cameras as a  
standard feature.  
Featuring a 100 Mbps recording rate for the VTR as  
well, this unit is capable of recording images with an  
extremely high picture quality to achieve the highest  
performance and most sophisticated functions as an  
integrated camera-recorder for electronic field  
production (EFP) applications.  
Furthermore, it is compact and lightweight, has low  
power consumption, and excels in achieving a high  
level of picture quality, sensitivity, and mobility, and is  
extremely dust-proof and moisture-proof. These are  
all attributes which enable the unit to be used for  
electronic news gathering (ENG) applications as well.  
Since digital signal processing is provided in both the  
camera unit and VTR unit, the picture quality is further  
improved while the unit’s stability is also enhanced.  
SD memory cards meeting global standards can be  
used for the camera and VTR setting data as part of a  
system which can accomplish data management.  
Features  
Features of the camera unit  
The camera unit of the AJ-HDC27H has the  
following features.  
OHigh sensitivity: 2000 lx, F11, 24P mode, shutter  
Film tone gamma function  
In the beginning, the first and foremost aspect defining  
the manifold powers of expression that only the  
medium of film could achieve was the extent of a  
film’s latitude (reproduction range). What Panasonic  
did was to use its resources to develop an exclusive  
gamma curve for reproducing film tones by means of  
the CCDs, and this led to the capability of expressing  
natural gradations and reproducing a rich variety of  
colors—something that was beyond the means of  
speed set to 50% of frame rate  
OFrame rate: 4 fps (frame/sec.) to 60 fps  
OHigh signal-to-noise ratio: 54 dB (standard)  
OLow smear  
OLow flare  
OScan reverse  
OSwitchable frame frequency: 59.94 Hz or 60.00 Hz  
O12-bit analog-to-digital converter incorporated  
OTwo HD SDI output lines  
conventional video cameras.  
The AJ-HDC27H  
incorporates a total of three gamma curves—two cine  
curves (for films/for videos) and the conventional  
video gamma curve—and it enables the curve that  
best suits the application at hand to be selected. The  
powers of expression achieved as a result are  
comparable to those provided by film. The high  
sensitivity that is simply superior to film cameras  
delivers an excellent balance between brightness and  
high picture quality: indeed, the kind of sensitivity that  
corresponds to ISO640 enables shooting with the  
same kind of feel as ultra-fine-grain films.  
When the conventional video gamma curve is to be  
used, set the unit to the video mode using the CAM  
MENU SEL item on the OPTION screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
When one of the cine curves is to be used, set the unit  
to the film mode using the CAM MENU SEL item on  
the OPTION screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4,  
and then select the desired curve by setting the CINE  
GAMMA SEL item on the GAMMA screen of FILM  
MAIN MENU 1.  
Variable frame rate  
Frame-drop (under-cranking) shooting and high-speed  
(over-cranking) shooting, which are special film  
shooting techniques, have been achieved for the first  
time in a video camera.  
The variable frame rate function can be set as desired  
from 4 fps (frame/sec.) to 60 fps.  
The shutter speed can also be set from 0.8% of the  
frame rate (aperture angle: 3 degrees) to 97.2%  
(aperture angle: 350 degrees), enabling full use to be  
made of many different presentation techniques.  
Along with continually recording at 60 fps, the VTR  
unit enables specific effective frames alone to be  
marked with time codes so that off-line editing using a  
conventional DVCPRO HD VTR is possible. This  
makes it possible to construct a 24 fps production  
system with minimal equipment investment.  
5
Features (continued)  
Features of the camera unit  
Prime lens mode  
Camera unit equipped to capture a wide range of  
image creation activities from cinema production  
to broadcasting applications  
Not only the lens that does justice to the sensitivity  
equivalent to a film but also the various devices and  
equipment that are peripheral to the camera combine to  
play roles which are so critical that they cannot be  
divorced from the technical skills of the person operating  
the camera. Using an HD lens adapter made by  
Angenieux, this unit supports the ultra-prime lenses used  
for film cameras as a standard feature. What’s more,  
Panasonic has achieved an industry first by incorporating  
as a standard feature, a scan reverse function, which  
cancels out image reversal occurring when the adapter is  
used, and switching can be easily accomplished by a  
menu setting.  
The unit also supports slide bases, matte boxes and  
other film camera equipment which users may have been  
using for years.  
A full range of long viewfinders, small LCD monitors and  
other options available from related manufacturers is  
available, and the maximum can be derived from formats  
ranging from films to HD with the same ease afforded by  
simply changing the main camera unit.  
OA sensitivity of F11 (2000 lx) achieved by the three  
highly sensitive CCDs.  
The minimum subject brightness is 0.7 lx.  
OGamma curves (switchable) for reproducing film  
tones.  
ONot only a natural choice like 24 fps (frame/sec.) for  
films but also any number of shooting frames from  
4 fps to 60 fps can be set.  
ODigital setup for controlling image production using  
numerical values and for simple operation using the  
jog dial and gradation menu.  
OCinema image menu provided for film producers.  
OSetup data in up to 8 files can be stored on an SD  
memory card.  
OBuilt-in high picture quality circuits including auto  
knee, many different detail functions, shading  
compensation, 12-axis color compensation circuit  
and masking circuit.  
OBuilt-in 2-level zebra pattern and spot zebra  
functions.  
O3 values among the 10 possible settings from –6 dB  
(–3 dB in film mode) to +30 dB allocated to the gain  
selector; also, the gain can be increased up to +36  
dB by the super gain function.  
OThe following functions can be allocated to the  
USER1 and USER2 buttons: super iris, super gain,  
super black, black stretch, audio CH1/CH2 input  
front/rear switching, recording start/stop, return  
switch, and Y GET (output luminance level  
measurement), frame rate switching.  
Film user menu  
Panasonic does its best to cater to film camera users not  
only on the functions and performance front but also in  
terms of operation.  
For instance, it has provided a cinema image menu  
(FILM USER MENU) which brings together on one page  
the setting items that are frequently used in location  
cinema shooting.  
Along with the gamma curve selection and scan reverse  
ON/OFF functions, the settings for the hard and soft  
texture adjustments, gradation settings for the shadow  
areas, latitude adjustments, and tungsten lighting  
(3200K) type or daylight (5600K) type can be selected  
just like with films on one menu screen.  
OAn electronic shutter with a variable function  
0.8% to 97.2% of the frame rate (aperture angle of 3.0 to  
350.0 degrees)  
over and above the 6 shutter speeds.  
Digital signal processing  
1/100 , 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000 and 1/2000 sec.  
(or 180.0, 172.8, 144.0, 120.0, 90.0 and 45.0 deg)  
Analog signals are converted into digital signals through  
12-bit A/D conversion at a sampling frequency of  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)/74.25 MHz (60.0Hz).  
This processing not only enhances the picture quality,  
stability and reliability but it also enables the viewfinder  
screen displays and many of the adjustment and setup  
items to be configured in a menu-driven format.  
OTungsten lighting (3200K) type or daylight (5600K)  
type can be selected just like with films on one  
menu screen. Two sets of ND&CC optical filters  
are featured as a standard option.  
OABB (automatic black balance) and AWB  
(automatic white balance) functions incorporated.  
Two values for each of the four CC filters can be  
retained as the AWB values.  
4-piece filter disc sets available as standard  
accessories  
The filter best suited to the subject’s brightness and color  
temperature can be selected. Two independent sets of  
filter discs, one for CC and one for ND, each with four  
filter discs, are provided as standard accessories.  
OStatuses and warnings are displayed on the  
viewfinder screen.  
6
Features (continued)  
Features of the VTR unit  
Digital system  
Built-in DOLBY NR system  
The pictures are compressed by a component digital  
recording system that uses the latest compression  
technology while non-compression PCM recording  
featuring excellent signal-to-noise ratio, frequency  
band, waveform characteristics and reproduction of  
detailed areas is employed for the sound. The result  
is an even higher picture and sound quality.  
The cue audio recording circuitry contains a Dolby B  
noise reduction circuit.  
Audio functions  
OA phantom power supply type of microphone  
(optional accessory) with sharp directivity  
characteristics can be attached. It can also be  
detached from the unit for use as an interview  
microphone.  
OOther kinds of microphones can also be connected  
and, using the model AJ-MH800G microphone  
holder (optional accessory), attached to the unit.  
Power saving management (SAVE REC) function  
When the VTR unit is used for recording, the playback  
system circuitry can be shut down, making it possible  
to perform operations with  
consumption.  
a
lower power  
NEWS REC function  
Scene-to-scene continuity  
This function especially supports shooting in the  
context of news gathering or documentary filming to  
ensure that no opportune shutter opportunities are  
passed up.  
Simply by pressing the VTR START button or lens  
VTR button, continuity between the scenes is  
obtained at a precision of 0 to +1 frame.  
In other words, by controlling the start key  
acknowledgment time, the unit can continuously  
record without the user having to interrupt the  
recording: this safeguards against the failure to record  
those precious moments—a failure that occurs when  
recording is resumed after it has been shut down  
temporarily.  
Rec review function  
The last 2 to 10 seconds of a recording are  
automatically rewound and played back to enable the  
user to quickly check what has been recorded.  
Playback function  
This function enables the playback picture (in black  
and white) to be viewed on the viewfinder screen.  
Color playback pictures can be output from the HD  
SDI MON connector.  
RETAKE function  
This function is for not leaving behind superfluous cuts  
when a cut turns out to be no good during the  
shooting of news, reports or art programs.  
Users should remember to handle this function very  
carefully.  
If there is enough leeway in the shooting time and a  
particular cut is clearly judged to be no good, the tape  
is rewound to the start of the cut concerned and the  
rec pause (rec standby) mode is established by  
operating the MODE CHECK button and lens RET  
button. Since recording is now commenced from that  
point on the tape, the no-good cut will be deleted. In  
order to prevent the cut prior to the no-good cut from  
being deleted, a part of the no-good cut equivalent to  
ten or so frames is left behind.  
Built-in time code generator/reader  
The same or separate time code information can be  
recorded on the dedicated sub-code track and video  
AUX area, and played back.  
External locking of time code  
The built-in time code generator can be locked to an  
external generator. A lithium battery is used as the  
backup power supply of the built-in time code  
generator to back up the memory data for about a  
year even when no power is supplied to the unit.  
Tape management information  
As the tape management information, this unit  
automatically saves the frame rate information on the  
shooting speeds, the active frame information on the  
first frame where the frame image was switched, and  
the active frame count information in the user bits of  
the sub-code track area (which used to be the LTC  
area).  
By cutting down on the time taken for copying onto the  
work tape, for instance, this function is very effective  
in achieving economical operation.  
INTERVAL REC function  
This function makes simple interval shooting possible.  
It proves to be very effective when shooting programs  
with a nature theme or art programs.  
O“DOLBY” and the double-D symbol Î are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.  
OOther names of companies and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective  
companies.  
7
System configuration  
Microphone kit  
AJ-MC700P  
Battery case  
AU-M402H  
BP-type  
battery  
2.0-inch viewfinder  
AJ-HVF27BP  
Sony  
Battery case  
Sony Battery  
Microphone holder  
AJ-MH800G  
Battery mount  
connector  
(accessory)  
Lens  
(Bayonet type)  
FUJINON/CANON  
Anton/Bauer Battery  
V-mount  
adapter plate  
Rain cover  
SHAN-RC700  
IDX Battery  
Sony Battery  
Tripod mount  
adapter  
SHAN-TM700  
Camera-Recorder  
AJ-HDC27H  
Extension control  
unit  
AJ-EC3  
AC adapter  
AJ-B75  
Soft carrying case  
AJ-SC900  
Cassette tape  
AJ-HP23LP  
AJ-HP32LP  
Hard carrying case  
AJ-HT901G  
Cleaning tape  
AJ-CL12LP  
SD (Secure Digital) memory card  
8
Parts and their functions  
Power supply section  
1
4
2
3
1Battery mount  
This is for attaching the Anton/Bauer battery pack.  
2DC IN (external power input) socket (XLR, 4P)  
When operating this unit using an AC power  
source, this socket is connected to the model AJ-  
B75 AC adapter (optional accessory).  
3BREAKER button  
To protect the equipment, the circuit breaker is  
tripped when an overcurrent flows inside the unit,  
and the power is automatically turned off. Push this  
button to the pushed-in position after performing  
internal inspections and adjustments. If there is no  
problem, the power will be turned back on.  
4POWER switch  
ON : Set here to turn on the power.  
OFF: Set here to turn off the power.  
9
Parts and their functions (continued)  
Accessory mounting section  
1
2 :  
1
5
6
3
4
6
8
7
;
9
1Hooks for attaching shoulder strap  
9Shoulder pad  
Attach the ends of the accessory shoulder strap to  
these hooks.  
This pad can be adjusted to facilitate operation  
when the unit is operated on the user’s shoulder.  
The pad position can be moved forward or  
backward when the two securing screws are  
loosened.  
2Light shoe  
Use this to attach the video light, etc.  
3Lens mount (Bayonet type)  
:Mounting hook for tape measure  
The tape measure used to measure the subject  
distance is attached here.  
Use this to attach the lens.  
4Lever for securing lens  
<Note>  
Insert the lens into the lens mount 3, and turn the  
This hook is not to be used for the shoulder strap.  
lens mount ring using this lever to secure the lens.  
;Focus mark  
5Lens mount cap  
This indicates the focus position of the CCD unit.  
To remove the cap, push the lever for securing the  
lens 4 up.  
Keep the cap in place while the lens is not  
attached.  
6Lens cable/microphone cable clamp  
This clamp is for anchoring the lens cable or  
microphone cable.  
7Tripod mount  
Mount the tripod adapter (SHAN-TM700), available  
as an optional accessory, when the unit is to be  
anchored to the tripod.  
8LENS terminal (12-pin)  
The connecting cable of the lens is connected here.  
For details concerning the lenses that can be used,  
consult your dealer.  
10  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
Audio function section (1)  
2
3
4
6
7
5
1
1MIC IN (microphone input) jack (XLR, 3-pin)  
Connect the microphone (optional accessory) here.  
The power for the microphone is supplied from this  
jack.  
5AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio input channel 1 & 2)  
connectors (XLR, 3-pin)  
An audio component or microphones are connected  
here.  
2AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2  
recording level adjustment) controls  
6LINE/MIC/+48V (line input/mic input/mic input +  
48V) selector switch  
When the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch 3 is  
set to MAN, the recording level of audio channels 1  
and 2 can be adjusted using these controls.  
This is used to switch the audio input signals from  
the audio component which has been connected to  
the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors 5.  
LINE : The audio input signals from the audio  
component serving as the line input are  
selected.  
MIC : The audio input signals from the internal  
power supply type of microphone are  
selected. (The phantom mic power is not  
supplied from the unit.)  
3AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2  
automatic/manual level adjustment selector)  
switch  
This is used to select the method for adjusting the  
audio levels of audio channels 1 and 2.  
AUTO : Set here for automatic adjustment.  
MAN : Set here for manual adjustment.  
+48V : The audio input signals from the external  
power supply type of microphone are  
selected. (The phantom mic power is  
supplied from the unit.)  
4AUDIO IN (audio input selector) switch  
This is used to select the input signals to be  
recorded on audio channels 1 and 2.  
FRONT : The input signals supplied from the  
microphone which has been connected to  
the MIC IN jack 1 are recorded.  
7CUE switch  
CH1: The audio CH1 signals are recorded on the  
cue track.  
REAR : The audio input signals supplied from the  
audio component which has been  
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
connectors 5 is recorded.  
MIX : Audio CH1 and CH2 mixed signals are  
recorded on the cue track.  
CH2: The audio CH2 signals are recorded on the  
cue track.  
<Note>  
This switch can be made ineffective using the VTR  
MAIN MENU. (See page 120)  
11  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
Audio function section (2)  
=>  
<Speaker  
The EE sound during recording or the playback  
sound during playback can be monitored through  
this speaker.  
The warning alarms are output in synchronization  
with the flashing or lighting of the warning lamps  
and warning displays.  
The sound heard from the speaker is automatically  
cut off when the earphone is connected to the  
PHONES jack ?.  
<
:
;
=MONITOR SELECT (audio channel selector)  
switch  
This is used to select the audio channels whose  
sound is to be output from the speaker or  
earphone.  
8
CH1: The audio CH1 signals are output.  
1/2 : The audio CH1 and CH2 mixed signals or  
stereo audio signals are output. However,  
only mixed signals are output through the  
speaker.  
?
9
8AUDIO OUT connector (XLR, 5-pin)  
CH2: The audio CH2 signals are output.  
This is connected to the audio component.  
The sound of audio CH1 and the sound of audio  
CH2 are output separately.  
The switching of the recording sound and playback  
sound is coupled with the setting of the MONITOR  
OUT switch.  
>MONITOR (audio selector) switch  
This is used to select the sound which is to be  
output to the earphone when “1/2” has been  
selected by the MONITOR SELECT switch =.  
ST : The audio CH1 and CH2 stereo audio signals  
are output.  
9DC OUT (DC power output) socket  
This is the DC 12 V output socket. A current of  
approximately 1.5 A can be supplied.  
MIX : The audio CH1 and CH2 mixed audio signals  
are output.  
?PHONES (earphone) jack (mini jack)  
:ALARM (warning alarm volume adjustment)  
control  
When an earphone (optional accessory) is  
connected, the sound selected by the MONITOR  
switch > can be heard from the earphone. In  
addition, the warning alarms relating to the unit’s  
operations or statuses can be heard through the  
earphone. An earphone which is capable of  
This is used to adjust the volume of the warning  
alarms from the earphone which has been  
connected to the speaker < or PHONES jack ?.  
The warning alarms are not audible when this  
control is at its lowest setting.  
delivering  
a
sufficiently high volume is  
recommended. However, when the earphone is  
connected, the sound heard through the speaker <  
will be automatically cut off.  
;MONITOR (volume adjustment) control  
This is used to adjust the volume of all the sound  
delivered through the speaker or earphone except  
for the warning alarms.  
The sound is not audible when this control is at its  
lowest setting.  
12  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
Viewfinder section  
7Front tally lamp  
=
> ; 7  
9
This lamp is activated when the TALLY switch 3 is  
set to the HIGH or LOW position, and it lights while  
the VTR unit is recording. It also flashes to provide  
a warning display like the REC lamp inside the  
viewfinder. The lamp’s brightness (HIGH or LOW)  
when it is lighted can be selected using the TALLY  
switch.  
:
<
1
8Back tally lamp  
8
ON  
This lamp lights while the VTR unit is recording. It  
also flashes to provide a warning display like the  
REC lamp inside the viewfinder.  
When the lever is set to OFF, the back tally lamp is  
hidden.  
4 5 2 3 6  
OFF  
(For details concerning the viewfinder, refer to the  
operating instructions of the viewfinder.)  
1Viewfinder (optional accessory)  
While recording or playback is underway, pictures  
can be viewed through the viewfinder in black and  
white. The warning displays concerning the unit’s  
operation statuses and settings, messages, zebra  
patterns and markers (safety zone markers and  
center marker) can also be seen in the viewfinder.  
9Eyepiece  
:Diopter adjustment ring  
This is adjusted in line with the camera operator’s  
diopter in such a way that the user can see the  
image on the viewfinder screen most clearly.  
2ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch  
;Connecting plug  
<Locking ring  
This is used to display the zebra pattern in the  
viewfinder.  
ON : The zebra pattern is displayed.  
OFF : The zebra pattern is not displayed.  
When the unit is shipped, the zebra pattern is set  
so that an area of less than 85% is displayed with a  
video level of at least 80% or so.  
The required area of zebra pattern can be  
displayed by setting the ZEBRA 1 DETECT,  
ZEBRA 2 DETECT and ZEBRA 2 items on the  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 screen.  
=Microphone holder  
>Viewfinder stopper  
This is used to attach and remove the viewfinder.  
@
?
3TALLY switch  
This is used to control the front tally lamp 7.  
HIGH: The brightness of the front tally lamp is  
increased.  
OFF : The front tally lamp is turned off.  
LOW : The brightness of the front tally lamp is  
reduced.  
4PEAKING control  
?Viewfinder left-right position anchoring ring  
This is used to adjust the left-right position of the  
viewfinder.  
This is used to adjust the outlines of the images  
seen inside the viewfinder to make focusing easier.  
Its adjustment does not affect the output signals of  
the camera.  
@Viewfinder front-back position anchoring ring  
This is used to adjust the front-back position of the  
viewfinder.  
5CONTRAST control  
This is used to adjust the contrast of the picture  
seen inside the viewfinder. Its adjustment does not  
affect the output signals of the camera.  
<Note>  
For details, refer to “Adjusting the viewfinder” (page  
34).  
6BRIGHT control  
This is used to adjust the brightness of the picture  
seen inside the viewfinder. Its adjustment does not  
affect the output signals of the camera.  
13  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
$ Examples of filter selection  
Shooting (recording)/playback  
function section (1)  
Shooting conditions  
CC filter  
ND filter  
Sunrise, sunset, inside a studio B (3200 K)  
1 (CLEAR)  
Outdoors under a clear sky  
C (4300 K) or 2 (1/4 ND) or  
D (6300 K)  
3 (1/16 ND)  
Outdoors under cloudy or rainy  
skies  
D (6300 K)  
1 (CLEAR) or  
2 (1/4 ND)  
Snowscapes, high mountains,  
C (4300 K) or 3 (1/16 ND) or  
seashores or other perfectly clear D (6300 K)  
scenery  
4 (1/64 ND)  
2
1
2Synchro scan adjustment switches  
These switches become effective when the shutter  
switch 7 is set to ON and SYNCHRO SCAN 1 is  
selected (The messages “SS:1 ¢¢.¢deg” appear  
on the viewfinder screen). They are used to adjust  
the synchro scan speed.  
When the “–” switch is pressed, the shutter speed is  
reduced; conversely, when the “+” switch is  
pressed, it is increased.  
3
1CC FILTER/ND FILTER (filter selector) control  
This is used to select the filter to match the light  
source which is illuminating the subject. If the  
control setting is changed while the menu display  
mode is set to “3” (default setting), the new setting  
will appear at the setting change message display  
area of the viewfinder screen.  
During personal computer monitor shooting, etc.  
adjust these switches to the positions where the  
horizontal bar noise inside the viewfinder is  
decreased.  
3WHITE BAL (white balance memory selector)  
switch  
PRST : The TUNGSTEN (3200 K) white balance  
value is stored in the memory.  
$ Control settings and filter selection  
CC FILTER control (large  
CC filter selection  
This can be changed to DAY LIGHT (5600  
K).  
diameter) setting  
A
B
C
D
Cross filter  
3200 K  
A or B : When the AUTO W/B BAL switch 6 is set to  
AWB, the white balance is automatically  
adjusted to match the setting position of the  
CC FILTER control 1, and the adjustment  
value is stored in memory A or memory B.  
When the CC FILTER control and the WHITE BAL  
switch are set to the same positions as they were  
when adjustment was performed, the adjustment  
value stored in the memory is recalled, and the unit  
is automatically adjusted to the white balance that  
corresponds to this value.  
4300 K  
6300 K  
<Note>  
The color temperatures shown above are those when the  
LIGHTING item is set to TUNGSTEN or the D5600K item is set to  
OFF on the CAMERA SETTING screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN  
MENU 1.  
ND FILTER control (small  
ND filter selection  
If this switch setting is changed while the menu  
display mode is set to “3” (default setting), the new  
setting will appear at the WHITE BAL switch display  
position on the viewfinder screen.  
diameter) setting  
CLEAR (Transparent)  
1/4 ND  
1
2
3
4
1/16 ND  
(Example: “A”)  
1/64 ND  
OThe two types shown above are provided for filter  
combinations.  
14  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
AUTO KNEE function  
Shooting (recording)/playback  
function section (2)  
If the level is adjusted to people or scenery for shooting when the  
background is very bright, the background becomes subject to  
white-out, causing the buildings and scenery in the background to  
be blurred. When the AUTO KNEE function is activated in a  
situation like this, the background can be reproduced distinctly.  
This function is very effective for shooting in the following  
situations.  
OWhen shooting people in the shade under a clear sky  
OWhen shooting people inside a vehicle or a building and  
outdoor scenery seen through windows at the same time  
OWhen shooting scenes with a high contrast  
5GAIN (gain selector) switch  
This is used to select the gain of the video amplifier  
in accordance with the lighting status during  
shooting. The gain values corresponding to the L,  
M and H settings are specified by the setting menu  
ahead of time.  
6
If this switch setting is changed while the display  
mode is set to “3,” the new setting will appear at the  
gain display position on the viewfinder screen.  
(Example: “12 dB”)  
5 4  
4OUTPUT (output signal selector)/AUTO KNEE  
switch  
6AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white balance/black  
balance adjustment) switch  
This is used to select the video signals which are to  
be output from the camera unit to the VTR unit,  
viewfinder and video monitor.  
The operation of the AUTO KNEE function can be  
selected using the AUTO KNEE SW item on the  
CAMERA SW MODE screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN  
MENU 2.  
AWB: This is selected when the white balance is to  
be adjusted automatically. When the WHITE  
BAL switch 3 is set to “A or B” at this time,  
the adjusted value will be stored in memory A  
or memory B.  
ABB : This is selected for automatically adjusting the  
black balance.  
The factory setting is FILM mode so that the AUTO  
KNEE function is at OFF.  
The adjusted value is stored in a dedicated  
memory.  
$ OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch setting position  
Black shading is automatically corrected when  
SHD and ABB SW CTRL on the OPTION  
screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4 are set  
to ON and the AUTO W/B BAL switch is  
pressed continuously for 8 seconds or more  
on the ABB side.  
BARS  
Color bar signals are output.  
Use this position in the following  
circumstances.  
OWhen the video monitor is to be adjusted  
OWhen the color bar signals are to be  
recorded  
CAM.  
The pictures shot by the camera are output.  
AUTO KNEE OFF The AUTO KNEE circuit is not activated.  
<Note>  
CAM.  
The pictures shot by the camera are output.  
The AUTO KNEE circuit is activated.  
When white balance or black balance are being  
automatically adjusted and the switch is pressed  
again to either the AWB side or to the ABB side, the  
automatic adjustment for the side pressed will be  
stopped.  
AUTO KNEE ON  
The adjusted value in this case is the value before  
automatic adjustment was performed.  
15  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
Shooting (recording)/playback  
function section (3)  
9
7
:
8
The user bits are also output from the HD SDI MON  
connector.  
The active frame count is output to the four higher  
digits of the user bits. The count is reset to zero  
each time recording starts, and the count is  
incremented with each active frame.  
7SHUTTER switch  
This is set to ON when the electronic shutter is to  
be used. When the SEL side is pressed, the  
shutter speed and mode display are changed in the  
range which was set ahead of time in the setting  
menu.  
The active frame information is output to the lowest  
digit of the user bits while the frame rate information  
is output to the third and fourth lower digits.  
<Note>  
If this switch setting is changed while the display  
mode is set to “2” or “3,” the new setting will appear  
at the shutter display position on the viewfinder  
screen.  
In order for the time code that matches the  
playback time code, which is output from the HD  
SDI MON connector, to be output from the TC OUT  
connector, set the MONITOR OUT switch to  
“EE/PB,” and select “TCG/TCR” as the TC OUT  
item setting on the TC/UB screen.  
(Example: “: 1/120”, “: 50%”, “: 180d”)  
8ECU REMOTE (remote control) connector (6-  
pin)  
The AJ-EC3 extension control unit (optional  
accessory) is connected here.  
<Note>  
:HD SDI EE connector (BNC)  
Before connecting or disconnecting the remote  
control cable, be absolutely sure to set the POWER  
switches on the unit and extension control unit to  
the OFF position.  
The HD SDI camera signals are always output from  
here. No menu items are contained in the output  
signals which are supplied from this connector.  
The active frame information is allocated to the user  
bits in the time code data in the signals and output  
from the connector. Use this connector when  
connecting a backup recorder for recording.  
The images may be disrupted when the frame rate  
has been changed or recording has started. For  
details, refer to “Variable frame rate” (page 63).  
9HD SDI MON connector (BNC)  
The HD SDI signals (video and audio) for the  
monitor in accord with the position of the MONITOR  
OUT switch ; are output from here.  
When the MONITOR OUT switch is at “EE/PB,” the  
EE video and EE audio signals will be output during  
recording and the playback video and playback  
audio signals will be output during playback.  
When the MONITOR OUT switch is at “EE,” the  
camera video signals are output at all times.  
When the CHARACTER switch is set to ON while  
performing the menu settings, it is possible to  
superimpose the setting menus onto the pictures  
being shot so that they can be checked on the  
monitor screen.  
16  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
Shooting (recording)/playback function section (4)  
;
=
>
<
;MONITOR OUT switch  
>VTR SAVE/STBY (tape protection) switch  
This is used to switch the VTR operation status  
while the REC PAUSE mode is established for the  
VTR recording.  
This is used to select the video and audio signals  
which are to be output from the HD SDI MON  
connector and the audio signals which are to be  
output from the AUDIO OUT connectors.  
EE/PB : During playback, the playback video and  
playback audio signals are output; in all  
other modes, the EE video and EE audio  
signals are output.  
SAVE: This is the tape protection mode. The  
cylinder is stopped in the half-loading status.  
Less power is consumed than at the STBY  
position, and the operating time provided by  
the battery is prolonged. Compared with the  
STBY position, it takes longer for recording to  
commence after the VTR START button =  
has been pressed.  
EE  
: The EE video and EE audio signals are  
output at all times.  
<Note>  
It should be borne in mind that some products may  
not be able to process properly the audio signals  
which are output from the HD SDI EE connector  
and the HD SDI MON connector at this 60.00 Hz  
frequency setting.  
When the switch is set to this position, the  
VTR SAVE lamp inside the viewfinder lights.  
STBY : At this position, recording is commenced as  
soon as the VTR START button is pressed.  
<Note>  
For details, consult your dealer.  
When the prescribed amount of time has elapsed in  
the STBY mode, the unit is automatically sets the  
switch to the SAVE status in order to protect the  
tape. To return the unit to the STBY mode, set the  
VTR SAVE/STBY switch to SAVE, and then again  
to the STBY position.  
<CHARACTER switch  
This controls whether the characters are to be  
superimposed onto the pictures which are output  
from the HD SDI MON connector.  
ON : The characters are superimposed.  
OFF: The characters are not superimposed.  
=VTR START button  
When this is pressed, recording starts; when it is  
pressed again, recording stops.  
This button functions in the same way as the lens  
VTR button.  
17  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
Shooting (recording)/playback  
function section (5)  
D
E
A
B
C
?
@
F
?MODE CHECK button  
DPLAY/PAUSE button  
While this button is held down, the camera’s setting  
mode is shown in the viewfinder.  
This does not affect the output signals of the  
camera.  
This is pressed to view the playback picture on the  
viewfinder screen or using a color video monitor.  
The button’s lamp comes on during playback.  
When it is pressed during playback, the unit is set  
to pause in the playback mode (PLAY PAUSE), and  
the button’s lamp flashes. If the unit is left in the  
pause mode for two minutes, it automatically  
changes to the stop (STOP) mode.  
@USER 1 and USER 2 buttons  
A user setting can be allocated to each of these  
buttons using the setting menu.  
When a button is pressed, the user setting mode  
allocated to it is selected.  
ESTOP button  
When the button is pressed again, the selected  
mode is released.  
This is pressed to stop the tape travel.  
FEMERGENCY screw (inside rubber cap)  
If the cassette does not eject even when the EJECT  
button is pressed, use a screwdriver or similar  
implement to push and turn the EMERGENCY  
screw at the same time: this will cause the cassette  
to be ejected.  
AEJECT button  
This is pressed to insert or eject the cassette.  
BREW button  
This is pressed to rewind the tape. The button’s  
lamp comes on during rewinding.  
When it is pressed during playback, the tape will be  
reviewed (rewound and played back) at about twice  
the regular speed while the button is held down.  
CFF button  
This is pressed to fast forward the tape. The  
button’s lamp comes on during fast forwarding.  
When it is pressed during playback, the tape will be  
cued (fast forwarded and played back) at about  
twice the regular speed while the button is held  
down.  
18  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
Warning/status display section  
4
1
2
3
5
1Back tally lamp (unit)  
When the back tally switch 2 is set to ON, this  
lamp serves the same function as the front tally  
lamp in the viewfinder.  
2Back tally switch  
This is used to control the unit’s back tally lamp 1.  
ON : The unit’s back tally lamp is operational.  
OFF: The unit’s back tally lamp is not operational.  
3WARNING lamp  
When a problem of some form or other occurs  
within the VTR unit, this lamp flashes or lights.  
4LIGHT switch  
ON : The display window 5 is illuminated.  
OFF: The illumination of the display window is  
turned off.  
5Display window  
This displays the alarms, remaining battery charge,  
audio levels, time data, etc. relating to the VTR unit.  
19  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
Menu operation section  
3JOG dial button  
When this dial button is turned while the menu  
screen is displayed, the cursor is moved to each of  
the setting items.  
The menu items are set by operating this dial  
button.  
There are two types of menus, MAIN and SUB, and  
each menu is displayed on a page-by-page basis.  
The menu configuration can be changed to suit the  
desired objective.  
For details on the menu operation method, refer to  
“Menu operations” on pages 86 to 88.  
Time code related section (1)  
3
2
1
1SD memory card insertion slot  
An SD memory card (optional accessory) is  
inserted here. This slot is used for writing/saving  
menu data. (See page 74)  
2MENU button  
When this is pressed, the camera unit’s user menu  
screen, which was set at the time of shipment,  
appears.  
When it is pressed again, the VTR unit’s user menu  
screen appears.  
1
When it is pressed once more, the menu screen  
display is cleared.  
3 2  
The selection of the menu for the user menu can be  
changed on the USER MENU SELECT screen.  
When the power is turned on  
Status display  
1GENLOCK IN connector (BNC)  
Supply the analog HD reference signal to this  
connector for gen-locking the camera unit or when  
externally locking the time code.  
1A B  
0dB  
CZ73  
<Note>  
Input reference signals (1280 a 720, 59.94 Hz or  
1280 a 720, 60 Hz) which have the same format as  
the unit.  
Press the MENU  
button.  
¢¢¢¢ FILMUSERMENU¢¢¢¢  
2TC IN connector (BNC)  
Camera unit’s user  
menu  
Supply the time code which will serve as the  
reference to this connector when externally locking  
the time code.  
Press the MENU  
button.  
3TC OUT connector (BNC)  
To lock the time code of an external VTR to the  
unit’s time code, connect this connector to the time  
code input (TC IN) connector on the external VTR.  
To simultaneously output the user bits containing  
the active frame information, refer to pages 16 and  
68.  
¢¢¢¢ VTRUSERMENU¢¢¢¢  
VTR unit’s user  
menu  
Press the MENU button.  
20  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
Time code related section (2)  
46  
5
9
8 7  
4HOLD button  
7“+” button, “–” button  
The time data display of the counter display section  
which was on the screen at the moment when this  
button is pressed is held. (However, the time code  
generator keeps running.) When the button is  
pressed again, the hold status is released.  
It is used, for instance, to find out the time at which  
a particular scene was shot.  
These are used to increment or decrement by 1 the  
figure in the digit which was made to flash by the  
SHIFT button 8 when the time code or user bits  
are to be set.  
8SHIFT button  
This causes the digit to be set to flash when the  
<Note>  
time code or user bits are to be set.  
If the HOLD button is pressed and held down while  
the DISPLAY switch 6 has been set to UB,  
“HOLD” on the counter display flashes, and the  
button functions to display the VITC user bits  
information recorded in the video AUX area on the  
counter display section.  
9TCG (time code selector) switch  
This is used to set the running mode of the built-in  
time code generator.  
F-RUN : Set here to have the time code run all the  
time regardless of the VTR’s operation.  
This position is used to align the time code  
with the time or externally lock the time  
code.  
SET : Set here when the time code or user bits  
are to be set.  
R-RUN : Set here to have the time code run only  
during recording.  
5RESET button  
This is used to reset the time data on the counter  
display section to “00:00:00:00.” If it is pressed  
while the TCG switch 9 is at the SET position, the  
time code data and user bits data are respectively  
reset to “00:00:00:00.”  
The time code on the tape with scene-to-  
scene continuity is recorded continuously.  
6DISPLAY switch  
This is used to display the time code, CTL or user  
bits on the counter display section depending on  
the setting positions of this switch and the TCG  
switch 9.  
UB : The user bits are displayed.  
TC : The time code is displayed.  
CTL : CTL is displayed.  
21  
Power supply  
A battery pack or an AC power source can be used as  
this unit’s power supply.  
Using the Anton/Bauer battery pack  
Attach the battery pack.  
Insert the pack in the direction shown by the  
arrows, and then slide it into position.  
To use the battery pack, there is a choice of  
makes of batteries below, namely:  
OPanasonic  
OAnton/Bauer  
OIDX  
1
OSony  
<Note>  
Batteries of other makes can also be supported by  
changing the setting menu but no guarantees are  
made for the system when they are actually used with  
this unit.  
Before using the battery pack, recharge the battery  
using the battery charger.  
(For details on the recharging method, refer to the  
operating instructions of the battery concerned.)  
To detach the battery, pull the battery mount  
removal lever all the way down, and slide the  
battery pack in the direction shown by the arrow.  
2
Removal lever  
Battery pack  
<Note>  
An intelligent battery system and ultra light system are  
supported.  
Set the battery type.  
3
Select the battery type using the BATTERY  
SELECT menu item. This item is selected from the  
<BATTERY/TAPE> screen.  
For details, refer to “Setting menu screens” (page  
117).  
22  
Power supply (continued)  
Using the Panasonic battery pack  
Connect the plug on the battery pack to the  
connector inside the case, and insert the battery  
pack.  
3
Remove the battery holder.  
1
Attaching the battery case to the unit.  
2
1Connect the cable on the camera-recorder to  
the cable on the battery case (BP-90 type).  
2Using a screwdriver, secure the battery case  
(BP-90 type) to the camera-recorder.  
Open the cover and lift the rubber cap so that  
the screw tightening hole is visible. Tighten the  
screws to secure the battery case to the  
camera-recorder. Be sure to fully tighten the  
screws.  
<Note>  
Before connecting or disconnecting the plug, be  
absolutely sure to turn off the unit’s power.  
Set the battery type.  
4
Select the battery type using the BATTERY  
SELECT menu item. This item is selected from the  
<BATTERY/TAPE> screen.  
<Notes>  
ODo not use excess force when lifting the rubber  
caps forcibly.  
OTake special care not to pinch the cable.  
For details, refer to “Setting menu screens” (page  
117).  
Battery case  
Connect  
(for BP-90 type)  
23  
Power supply (continued)  
Using the Sony battery pack  
Using the V-mount type battery  
pack  
Remove the battery holder.  
1
Attach the V-mount adapter plate.  
Insert it in the direction shown by the arrows, and slide  
it into place.  
Attach the accessory battery mounting connector.  
2
Battery mounting  
connector  
Attach the Sony battery case to the unit.  
3
1Tighten the mounting screws.  
2Tighten the power contact screws.  
3Insert the top of the detached cover in the  
direction shown by the arrows.  
4Align the holes in the bottom of the cover (metal  
part) with the holes at the bottom of the case,  
and use the screws to attach the case.  
<Note>  
When mounting the battery case, take care not to  
pinch the connecting cord.  
1
Please consult your local dealer for any questions  
regarding the NP/BP adapter plate or V-mount  
adapter plate.  
3
2
4
Set the battery type.  
4
Select the battery type using the BATTERY  
SELECT menu item. This item is selected from the  
<BATTERY/TAPE> screen.  
For details, refer to “Setting menu screens” (page  
117).  
24  
Power supply (continued)  
Using an AC power supply  
(When the AJ-B75 AC adapter is used)  
Connect the DC OUT connector on the AJ-B75 AC  
adapter to the DC IN socket on the unit.  
1
DC IN socket  
Set the power of the AC adapter to ON.  
2
Set the unit’s power switch to ON.  
3
<Notes>  
OCheck the pin signals of the DC IN socket when  
using an external power supply other than the AJ-  
B75 AC adapter. (DC 12 V, 8.5 A)  
Supplying +12V power to the GND terminal by  
mistake may give rise to ignition, resulting in a fire,  
or it may cause injury.  
OPower from the AC adapter takes precedence when  
both a battery pack and AC adapter have been  
connected.  
OWhen using the AC adapter, be absolutely sure to  
first set the power of the AC adapter to ON and  
then set the unit’s power switch to ON.  
If the power is turned on in the reverse sequence,  
the output voltage of the AC adapter will rise  
gradually, and the unit may malfunction as a result.  
Pin no.  
Signal  
GND  
1
2
3
1
2, 3  
4
==  
4
+12 V  
25  
Attaching the lens  
Raise the lever for securing the lens, and detach  
the mount cap.  
Push the cable into the cable clamp, and connect it  
to the LENS socket.  
1
4
Lever for securing  
the lens  
Mount cap  
LENS socket  
<Notes>  
Align the center mark of the lens with the groove in  
the top center of the lens mount, and attach the  
lens.  
2
OFor details on handling the lens, refer to the  
operating instructions which accompany the lens.  
OThe following lens adjustments and camera  
adjustments may be necessary depending on the  
lens mounted.  
Mark  
1. Lens flange back adjustment  
2. Lens auto iris operating speed adjustment  
3. Lens white shading adjustment (performed on  
the unit)  
Push down the lever for securing the lens to  
secure the lens.  
3
26  
Adjusting the lens flange  
If the subject is not focused properly in the telephoto  
and wide-angle modes during zoom operations, adjust  
the flange back (distance from the lens mounting  
surface to the image-forming surface).  
Once this adjustment is done, it need not be redone  
unless the lens is replaced.  
Adjustment method  
<Note>  
For details on the adjustment method and lens  
positions, refer also to the operating instructions that  
accompany the lens.  
Approx. 3  
meters  
Attach the lens to the camera.  
At this stage, do not forget to connect the lens  
cable.  
Shoot the chart used for the flange back  
adjustment, and turn the distance ring to adjust the  
focus.  
1
6
Set the lens aperture to manual and open the  
aperture.  
Set the zoom ring to the wide-angle position, and  
turn the F.f ring to adjust the focus.  
Take care not to move the distance ring during this  
process.  
2
3
7
Set the lighting in such a way that the appropriate  
video output level is achieved at a distance of  
about 3 meters away from the chart used for the  
flange back adjustment.  
If the video level is too high, use the filters and  
shutter.  
Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the focus is adjusted at  
both the telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
8
9
Tighten the screw securing the F.f ring.  
Loosen the screw securing the F.f (flange focus)  
ring.  
<Note>  
On some lenses, this may be marked as F.b  
(flange back) ring.  
4
5
Set the zoom ring to the telephoto position either  
manually or electrically.  
27  
Adjusting the white shading  
This unit comes with a function for storing white  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “VF DISPLAY” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 2.  
4
shading adjustment values. Up to eight of these  
values can be stored in the internal memory.  
Alternatively, they can be stored on an SD memory  
card.  
<VFDISPLAY>  
n
Using this data, it is possible to quickly reproduce the  
appropriate white shading adjustment even after  
switching lenses.  
DISPCONDITION  
DISPMODE  
VFOUT  
:NORMAL  
:3  
:Y  
VFDTL  
:4  
ZEBRA1DETECT  
ZEBRA2DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
LOWLIGHTLVL  
SYNCHROSCANDISP.:deg  
ECUMENUDISP. :ON  
:080%  
:085%  
:SPOT  
:45%  
<Notes>  
OThe method below can be used for the white  
shading adjustments with most lenses. However,  
with some very special lenses, a different  
adjustment method may be necessary.  
OEven when the white shading has been adjusted,  
tinting may occur in the vertical direction near the  
lens aperture open position. This is a phenomenon  
which is inherent to lenses and optical systems and  
is not indicative of malfunctioning.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the ZEBRA1 DETECT item, and press  
the JOG dial button.  
5
Turn the JOG dial button, select 70% and then  
press the JOG dial button to enter the setting.  
Storing white shading adjustment values  
6
7
8
Attach the lens to the camera.  
At this stage, do not forget to connect the lens  
cable.  
1
Repeat steps 5 and 6, however this time set the  
ZEBRA2 DETECT to 85% and ZEBRA2 to SPOT.  
Set the electronic shutter to OFF, and set the gain  
to “L (0 dB).”  
2
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the <VF DISPLAY> item, and press the  
JOG dial button.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 item.  
9
Press the JOG dial button until FILM (CAM)  
10  
MAIN MENU 4 is displayed, then turn the JOG  
dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
WHITE SHADING item, and press the JOG dial  
button again.  
2222  
2222  
FILMMAINMENU4  
GAIN: L (0 dB)  
SHUTTER: OFF  
FILMUSERMENUSELECT1  
FILMUSERMENUSELECT2  
FILMUSERMENUSELECT3  
BLACKSHADING  
WHITESHADING  
FLARE  
n
COLORIMETRY  
INITIALIZE  
DIAGNOSTIC  
EVALUATION  
If the lens is provided with an extender, disengage  
the extender function.  
3
OPTION  
28  
Adjusting the white shading (continued)  
Performing white shading adjustments  
Repeat step 13.  
15  
Set the ZEBRA switch on the viewfinder to ON.  
11  
12  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “WHITE SHADING” screen of  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
16  
Shoot a sheet of white paper devoid of colour  
irregularities.  
<Note>  
Since flicker tends to occur under fluorescent  
lights, mercury lamps and other such lights, use  
a source of light such as sunlight or a halogen  
lamp which does not tend to produce flicker.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the DETECTION (V SAW) item.  
17  
<WHITESHADING>  
DETECTION(VSAW)  
CORRECT  
n
:ON  
Set the lens aperture to manual, and adjust the  
lens aperture in such a way that ZEBRA fills the  
whole screen.  
13  
Check that the lens aperture is between F/4 and  
F/11.  
<Notes>  
OSince unevenness in the lighting will make it  
impossible for ZEBRA to fill part of the  
screen, try adjusting the lighting position, etc.  
OTry adjusting the lighting position, etc. also  
when the lens aperture is not between F/4  
and F/11.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the  
following message appears.  
18  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
OAlways be sure to leave the electronic shutter  
at OFF.  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE  
:
1Set the WHITE BAL selector switch to “A” or  
“B,” and initiate the automatic white balance  
(AWB) adjustment using the AUTO W/B BAL  
switch.  
14  
DETECT?  
YES  
NO  
n
2Initiate the automatic black balance (ABB)  
adjustment using the AUTO W/B BAL switch.  
3Initiate the automatic white balance (AWB)  
adjustment again using the AUTO W/B BAL  
switch.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
“ACTIVE” appears on the screen to indicate that  
automatic adjustment of white shading is being  
performed.  
19  
20  
“END” appears on the screen upon completion  
of the adjustment.  
Press the MENU button twice upon completion  
of the adjustment.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
WHITE BAL switch:  
“A” or “B”  
AUTO W/B BAL  
switch  
29  
Adjusting the white shading (continued)  
If the lens is provided with an extender, engage  
the extender function, and repeat steps 13 to  
20.  
21  
The compensation values for when the lens  
extender function is provided and for when it is  
not are both stored in one file in memory.  
The white shading adjustment is now complete.  
The adjusted values are retained in the non-volatile  
memory so that there is no need to adjust the white  
shading again even after the unit’s power is turned off.  
When a multiple number of lenses are to be used,  
refer to “Writing the white shading adjustment values  
and flare adjustment values in the internal memory”  
on the following pages.  
30  
Adjusting the white shading (continued)  
Writing the white shading adjustment  
values and flare adjustment values in the  
internal memory  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) moves to the title input area, and the input  
mode is established.  
6
Up to eight white shading adjustment values can be  
stored in the internal memory. Since they are stored  
at the same time as the flare adjustment values, it is  
recommended that the FLARE screen of CAM MAIN  
MENU 4 be opened and the flare adjusted before  
storing these values in the internal memory.  
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
WRITE  
:1  
RESETALL  
m
TITLE:  
1:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
Select the file No.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “LENS FILE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 3.  
1
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed  
7
is switched in the following sequence:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the FILE SELECT item  
2
Space: )  
7
letters: A—Z  
Press the JOG dial button and the file number will  
flash. Turn the JOG dial button to select the file (1  
to 8) to be recorded.  
7
3
numbers: 0—9  
7
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –, . , x  
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
WRITE  
:1  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
8
9
RESETALL  
TITLE:  
n
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the next position (right), and repeat  
steps 7 and 8 to set the characters (maximum of  
12).  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
When the title has been input, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the arrow (cursor) to the “:”  
position.  
10  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number.  
4
Give a title to the selected file.  
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESETALL  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “TITLE : ” item.  
5
m
222222222222  
TITLE:  
<LENSFILE>  
1:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
FILESELECT  
READ  
WRITE  
:1  
RESETALL  
TITLE:  
n
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
31  
Adjusting the white shading (continued)  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) returns to the TITLE: item.  
11  
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESETALL  
222222222222  
TITLE:  
n
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the WRITE position.  
12  
13  
14  
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESETALL  
n
222222222222  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the  
following message appears.  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE  
:
WRITE?  
YES  
NO  
n
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The current white shading adjustment and flare  
adjustment values are now stored in the unit’s  
internal memory.  
<Note>  
The values will not be stored in the unit’s  
internal memory if another menu screen is  
selected without executing WRITE or if the  
menu is exited.  
Press the MENU button twice upon completion  
of the adjustment.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
15  
32  
Adjusting the white shading (continued)  
Reading the white shading adjustment  
values and flare adjustment values from  
the internal memory  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The recorded data from the white shading file is  
read.  
7
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “LENS FILE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 3.  
1
8Press the MENU button twice.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the FILE SELECT item  
2
Press the JOG dial button and the file number will  
flash. Turn the JOG dial button to select the file (1  
to 8) to be read.  
3
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
:1  
n
WRITE  
RESETALL  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number.  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the READ item  
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
WRITE  
:1  
n
RESETALL  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
6
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE  
:
READ?  
YES  
NO  
n
33  
Adjusting the viewfinder  
(The viewfinder is an optional accessory.)  
Adjusting the viewfinder’s front-back  
position  
Attaching the viewfinder and  
adjusting its position  
Loosen the viewfinder front-back position  
anchoring ring.  
1
The viewfinder’s position can be adjusted in the front-  
back and left-right directions so that what appears on  
its screen inside can be seen most easily.  
Slide the viewfinder to the front or back, and adjust  
it to a position that allows easy viewing.  
2
Attaching the viewfinder and adjusting its  
position  
Tighten the viewfinder front-back position  
anchoring ring.  
3
Connect the viewfinder’s plug to the viewfinder  
connector.  
1
Viewfinder front-back position anchoring ring  
Loosen the ring.  
Loosen the viewfinder left-right position anchoring  
ring.  
2
Removing the viewfinder  
Loosen the viewfinder left-right position anchoring  
ring.  
1
While pulling up the viewfinder stopper, attach the  
viewfinder by sliding it in the direction of the arrow.  
3
While pulling up the viewfinder stopper, remove the  
viewfinder by sliding it in the direction of the arrow.  
2
Viewfinder  
stopper  
Tighten the ring.  
Viewfinder  
stopper  
Adjusting the viewfinder’s left-right  
position  
Release the viewfinder cable and mic cable from  
the cable clamps, and disconnect the cables.  
3
Loosen the viewfinder left-right position anchoring  
1
ring.  
Slide the viewfinder to the left or right, and adjust it  
to a position that allows easy viewing.  
2
Tighten the viewfinder left-right position anchoring  
ring.  
3
Tighten the ring.  
Viewfinder left-right  
position anchoring  
ring  
34  
Audio input preparation  
When attaching a microphone to  
the viewfinder (optional accessory)  
for use  
The microphone of the AJ-MC700P mic kit (optional  
accessory) can be attached to the viewfinder.  
Open the mic holder.  
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches to “FRONT”  
in accordance with the audio channel or channels  
whose sound is to be recorded.  
1
4
AJ-HVF27BP  
Mic holder  
Attach the microphone, and tighten the locking  
screw.  
2
Locking  
screw  
AUDIO IN switches  
Connect the microphone’s connecting cable to the  
MIC IN jack on the camera.  
3
MIC IN jack  
35  
Audio input preparation (continued)  
When attaching a microphone to  
the main unit for use  
Attaching the AJ-MH800G mic holder (optional  
accessory)  
Remove the screws used to attach the mic holder.  
Connect the microphone’s connecting cable to the  
MIC IN jack on the camera.  
1
5
6
MIC IN jack  
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches to “FRONT”  
in accordance with the audio channel or channels  
whose sound is to be recorded.  
Attach the microphone holder (AJ-MH800G) to the  
camera recorder using the the 2 screws included.  
2
Screws provided with mic holder  
Attach the microphone to the microphone holder  
and tighten the locking screw.  
3
AUDIO IN switches  
Locking screw  
Loosen the locking lever and adjust the  
microphone angle then tighten the locking lever  
again.  
4
Locking lever  
36  
Audio input preparation (continued)  
When connecting a microphone to  
the MIC IN jack  
When connecting a microphone to  
the AUDIO IN connector  
Connect the microphone’s connecting cable to the  
MIC IN jack on the camera.  
Connect the microphone’s connecting cable to the  
1
1
AUDIO IN connector on the camera.  
Two microphones can be connected to the CH1  
and CH2 connectors.  
MIC IN jack  
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches to “FRONT”  
in accordance with the audio channel or channels  
whose sound is to be recorded.  
2
AUDIO IN  
connectors  
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches for the  
channel or channels to which the microphone or  
microphones have been connected to “REAR.”  
2
AUDIO IN switches  
<Note>  
When extending the microphone’s connecting cable,  
use a cable which supports the phantom power supply  
system.  
AUDIO IN switches  
<Note>  
When the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch is set to  
“+48V,” the phantom power supply system is  
supported.  
37  
Audio input preparation (continued)  
When connecting audio components  
Connect the AUDIO IN connectors on the camera  
with the audio component using the XLR cable.  
1
AUDIO IN  
connectors  
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches for the  
channel or channels to which the audio component  
has been connected to “REAR.”  
2
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the rear  
panel to “LINE.”  
3
LINE/MIC/+48V  
selector switch  
AUDIO IN switches  
38  
Mounting the unit on a tripod  
Use the tripod adapter available as an optional  
accessory for mounting the unit onto a tripod.  
Detaching the unit from the tripod adapter  
While pressing the red lever, move the black lever in  
the direction of the arrow, slide the unit toward the  
rear, and detach it.  
Attach the tripod adapter to the tripod.  
<Note>  
Select the adapter holes that best support the  
center of gravity of the unit and tripod adapter.  
Check that the diameters of the selected holes  
match the diameters of the pan head.  
1
Tripod adapter  
Black lever  
Red lever  
<Note>  
Tripod adapter  
If the pins in the tripod adapter fail to return to their  
original positions after the camera has been  
detached, press the red lever again and at the same  
time move the black lever in the direction of the  
arrow: this will return the pins to their original  
positions.  
Pan head  
Bear in mind that the camera cannot be attached  
while the pins are left in the center.  
Attach the camera to the tripod adapter.  
Slide the camera toward the front along the  
grooves until it clicks into place.  
2
39  
Attaching the shoulder strap  
Attach the shoulder strap to the shoulder strap  
mounting hooks, and adjust the length of the strap.  
<Note>  
To detach the shoulder strap, open the clips on the  
mounting parts and detach.  
1
Check that the shoulder strap is securely fastened.  
The clip opens when it  
is pressed here.  
Shoulder strap  
The clip opens  
when it is  
pressed here.  
<Note>  
This mounting hook is for attaching the tape measure  
that is used to measure the subject distance.  
It is not to be used for the shoulder strap.  
Adjusting the shoulder pad position  
The shoulder pad can be slid up to 15 mm either  
backward or forward from the center position (factory  
setting).  
Adjust the pad’s position to operate the unit with the  
optimum ease.  
Loosen the two screws.  
1
Slide the shoulder pad either backward or forward,  
and find the optimum position.  
2
Tighten the screws to secure the shoulder pad.  
3
Screws  
Shoulder pad  
1•3  
2
Bottom section  
40  
Attaching the rain cover  
Example showing use of the SHAN-  
RC700 rain cover  
Tighten the cord.  
Close using the fastener.  
Close using the fastener.  
Connecting the extension control unit  
By connecting the AJ-EC3 extension control unit  
(optional accessory), some of the functions can be  
operated by remote control.  
When the AJ-EC3 is connected and the POWER  
switches on the unit and AJ-EC3 are set to ON, the  
unit is automatically set to the remote control mode.  
<Notes>  
OBefore connecting or disconnecting the dedicated  
cable, be absolutely sure to set the POWER  
switches on the unit and AJ-EC3 to OFF.  
OWhen “OFF” has been selected as the ECU DATA  
SAVE setting on the CAMERA SW MODE screen  
of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2, all the adjustments  
and settings made using the AJ-EC3 will be cleared  
when the unit’s power switch is set to OFF.  
When the unit is connected to the AJ-EC3 again,  
the KNEE POINT, KNEE SLOPE, GAMMA,  
MASTER PEDESTAL and DETAIL items are  
returned to the AJ-EC3 settings.  
Dedicated cable  
OWhen “ON” has been selected as the ECU DATA  
SAVE setting on the CAMERA SW MODE screen  
of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2, all the adjustments  
and settings made using the AJ-EC3 will not be  
cleared even when the unit’s power switch is set to  
OFF.  
AJ-  
6
5
1
ECU connector  
AJ-EC3  
41  
Viewfinder lamp displays  
1
TALLY / REC  
BATT  
VTR  
Viewfinder pictured here is the AJ-HVF27BP  
(For details concerning the viewfinder, refer to  
the operating instructions of the viewfinder.)  
SAVE  
3
2
4
1TALLY/REC (recording) lamp  
4VTR SAVE (VTR power-saving) lamp  
This lights when the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is set  
to SAVE. It goes off during recording.  
This lights up (red) during recording. It flashes  
when a problem has occurred.  
For details, refer to the section on the “Warning  
system” (pages 126, 127).  
<Note>  
In the rec pause mode, the SAVE mode is  
established automatically, and the lamp lights after  
the time set for the pause timer (temporary stop  
time) has elapsed.  
After four minutes have elapsed in the play pause  
mode, the SAVE mode is established automatically,  
and after six minutes have elapsed the lamp lights.  
2BATT (battery) lamp  
This starts flashing when the battery voltage has  
dropped to the level where the battery will no longer  
be usable in several minutes’ time, and it lights  
when the battery is no longer usable. To prevent  
operation from being interrupted, replace the  
battery before the battery has discharged  
completely.  
For details, refer to the section on the “Warning  
system” (pages 126, 127).  
3
(abnormal operating status warning) lamp  
This lights when the unit is set to an abnormal  
operating status for any of the items set to “ON” on  
the “!LED” screen of the setting menu.  
For details on selecting the items targeted for the  
lamp display, refer to the section on “Setting the  
lamp displays” (next page).  
42  
Viewfinder lamp displays (continued)  
Setting the  
lamp displays  
Select the items targeted for the  
the “!LED” screen of the FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
screen.  
lamp display on  
Setting item  
GAIN (0 dB)  
Description of setting  
Lamp display appears when the gain is  
set to a value other than “0 dB.”  
GAIN (–3 dB)  
SHUTTER  
Lamp display appears when the gain is  
set to a value other than “–3 dB.”  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88) to  
open the “!LED” screen.  
1
Lamp display appears when the  
SHUTTER switch is at ON.  
<!LED>  
n
WHITE PRESET  
Lamp display appears when “PRST”  
applies to the channel in the white  
balance memory.  
GAIN(0dB)  
GAIN(–3dB)  
SHUTTER  
WHITEPRESET  
EXTENDER  
FILTER  
BLACKSTR  
DAYLIGHT  
MATRIX  
COLORCORRECTION:OFF  
FRAMERATE :ON  
:ON  
:OFF  
:ON  
:OFF  
:ON  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
EXTENDER  
FILTER  
Lamp display appears when the lens  
extender is used.  
Lamp display appears when the filter is  
set to a value other than “3200 K.”  
BLACK STR  
Lamp display appears when the black  
stretch is at ON.  
DAY LIGHT  
(FILM MENU)  
Lamp display appears when the white  
balance presetting is DAY LIGHT.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the desired item.  
D5600K  
(CAM MENU)  
Lamp display appears when the white  
balance presetting is 5600 K.  
2
3
MATRIX  
Lamp display appears when the matrix is  
at ON.  
For the selected item, press the JOG dial button,  
and set whether or not the item is to be displayed  
on the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button, select display (ON) or no  
display (OFF) and press the JOG dial button to  
enter the selection.  
COLOR  
CORRECTION  
Lamp display appears when the color  
correction is at ON.  
FRAME RATE  
Lamp display appears when the frame  
rate has been set to 11 fps or below.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set ON or OFF for the  
4
5
other items.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
43  
Viewfinder screen status displays  
In addition to the pictures shot, the unit’s settings and  
messages indicating its operating statuses are  
displayed on the viewfinder screen. The center  
marker and safety zone markers also appear.  
The items which have been set to ON by the switches  
relating to the viewfinder displays or the VF DISPLAY  
screen of the setting menu are displayed at the top  
and bottom of the screen.  
When settings have been changed or adjustments  
have been made, messages advising the user of what  
has been set, what progress has been made in the  
adjustments and what the adjustment results are can  
be displayed for about 3 seconds.  
$ Display items and where they are displayed  
1 Extender display  
2 Shutter speed/mode display  
3 Remaining tape display  
4 Battery voltage display  
5 Filter display  
6 White balance memory display  
7 Gain display  
8 Audio level display  
9 Aperture display  
: Camera warning/information display  
; Safety zone markers  
< Center marker  
= Super iris ON display  
> Zoom position display  
? TCG display  
@ Master gain setting display  
A Color temperature display PRE/A/B  
B Battery type  
C Total tape length  
D Preset color temperature display  
E VTR warning/information display  
F Interval recording mode display (flashing)  
G AUDIO CH1/CH2 input display  
H Frame rate information display  
I
lamp information display  
J Frame frequency information display  
K Operation mode display  
L Compression mode display  
H
2
A =  
3
C
4
;
;
B
24 1/250 S  
EX2  
10min 14.6V  
/32 BP402  
1
@
I
L
<
COMP  
:
?
J
K
D
E
F
59.9  
F
TCG 00:00:00:00  
!D.L.  
1B A 12dB  
iREC  
F5.6 Z99  
;
;
5
6
7
8
G
9
>
44  
Viewfinder screen status displays (continued)  
1Extender display  
9Aperture display  
This appears when the lens extender is being used.  
This indicates the approximate aperture setting (F  
number).  
2Shutter speed/mode display  
This indicates the shutter speed or shutter mode  
setting.  
<Note>  
This appears when a lens with an aperture display  
function is being used.  
The unit in which the shutter speed is displayed can  
be set on the VF DISPLAY screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2.  
:Camera warning/information display  
The black balance, white balance, auto knee  
function, super iris, super gain and other alarm  
displays and warnings appear here.  
OOFF (no display):  
The shutter is not used.  
O1/100, 1/120, 1/250 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000  
(180d, 172.8d, 144d, 120d, 90d, 45d):  
Shutter speeds in the fixed mode  
O3.0d to 350.0d/0.8% to 97.2% (SYNCHRO  
SCAN):  
;Safety zone markers  
These indicate the 80% or 90% (factory setting)  
range of the surface area of the viewfinder screen.  
The display range proportion is set on the VF  
DISPLAY screen of the setting menu.  
For details, refer to “Setting the marker displays”  
(page 49).  
Selection of synchro scan mode  
In the synchro scan 1 mode, “Y” appears  
immediately in front of the number displayed.  
3Remaining tape display  
<Center marker  
During recording, this shows the remaining tape (in  
minutes) in the VTR. When less than two minutes  
of tape remain, the figure starts flashing.  
This indicates the center of the viewfinder screen.  
The display is set ON or OFF on the VF DISPLAY  
screen of the setting menu.  
4Battery voltage display  
=Super iris ON display  
This indicates the battery voltage (V) during  
“S” appears when the super iris is ON.  
operation.  
The voltage is displayed as a  
percentage when a digital battery is used.  
>Zoom position display  
The distance from the WIDE end to TEL end of the  
zoom lens is indicated here as a number from 0 to  
99.  
5Filter display  
This indicates the type of filter selected.  
6White balance memory display  
?TCG display  
This indicates the automatic adjustment memory  
This indicates the time code generator value.  
selected for the white balance.  
A: The WHITE BAL switch has been set to “A.”  
B: The WHITE BAL switch has been set to “B.”  
P: The WHITE BAL switch has been set to “PRST.”  
@Master gain setting display  
The GAIN L/M/H values currently set appear here  
when the MODE CHECK button is pressed.  
7Gain display  
AColor temperature display PRE/A/B  
This indicates the gain (dB) of the video amplifier  
This indicates the color temperature when AWB is  
which was set using the GAIN switch.  
executed using white balance memory A or B.  
8Audio level display  
This indicates the audio level (which can be  
displayed separately for audio CH1 and CH2).  
During sine wave input, it roughly corresponds with  
the VTR’s level meter as shown below.  
Audio level display  
VTR’s level meter  
+
0
-40 -30 -25 -18/20 -15 -10 -5  
45  
Viewfinder screen status displays (continued)  
BBattery type  
Selecting the display items  
This indicates the type of battery selected.  
The items to be displayed on the viewfinder screen  
can each be set to ON or OFF on the “VF  
INDICATOR” screen of the FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU  
2 or on the “VTR VF INDICATOR” screen of the VTR  
MENU.  
CTotal tape length  
This indicates the total length of the cassette tape.  
DPreset color temperature display  
When DAY LIGHT has been selected as the setting  
for the LIGHTING item which is set from the  
CAMERA SETTING screen of VTR (CAM) MAIN  
MENU 1, it indicates D.L., and when ON has been  
selected as the setting for the D5600K item, it  
indicates 5600.  
Selectable items  
On the “VF INDICATOR” screen of FILM (CAM)  
MENU  
OExtender display (EXTENDER)  
OShutter speed/mode display (SHUTTER)  
OFilter display (FILTER)  
OWhite balance memory display (WHITE)  
OGain display (GAIN)  
EVTR warning/information display  
Alarm displays such as SLACK, REC WARNING,  
HUMID, SERVO and RF as well as other warnings  
are indicated here.  
OAperture value and super iris ON display (IRIS)  
OCamera ID display (CAMERA ID)  
OZoom position display (ZOOM LVL)  
OColor temperature display (COLOR TEMP)  
OFrame rate display (FRAME RATE)  
OGamma curve display (VERSION ID)  
<Note>  
FInterval recording mode display (flashing)  
GAUDIO CH1/CH2 input display  
The input signals to be recorded in audio channels  
1 and 2 are indicated here.  
The camera ID appears when color bar signals are  
to be recorded in accordance with the  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch setting.  
For details, refer to “Setting the camera ID” (page  
50).  
HFrame rate information display  
This indicates the frame rate which has been set.  
I
lamp information display  
This indicates the information when the  
has lighted.  
lamp  
<VFINDICATOR>  
n
JFrame frequency information display  
EXTENDER  
SHUTTER  
FILTER  
WHITE  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
This indicates the frame frequency (59.9 Hz or  
60.00 Hz) which has been set.  
GAIN  
:ON  
IRIS  
CAMERAID  
ZOOMLVL  
:S+IRIS  
:ON  
:OFF  
KOperation mode display  
COLORTEMP :ON  
FRAMERATE :ON  
VERSIONID :ON  
This indicates the unit’s operation mode (F: FILM or  
V: VIDEO) which has been set.  
LCompression mode display  
This indicates COMP when DARK has been  
selected as the setting for the COMPRESSION  
MODE item which in turn is set from FUNCTION on  
the VTR MAIN MENU screen.  
46  
Viewfinder screen status displays (continued)  
On the “VTR VF INDICATOR” screen of VTR MENU  
ORemaining tape display (TAPE)  
Selecting the display items  
ORemaining battery charge display (BATTERY)  
OLevel meter display (LEVEL METER)  
OAudio CH1/CH2 input display (AUDIO IN)  
OTime code display (TC)  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88) to  
open the “VF INDICATOR” screen.  
1
<VFINDICATOR>  
n
OVTR warning display (VTR WARNING)  
OCompression mode display (COMPRESSION)  
OSAVE lamp display (SAVE LED)  
EXTENDER  
SHUTTER  
FILTER  
WHITE  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
GAIN  
:ON  
IRIS  
CAMERAID  
ZOOMLVL  
COLORTEMP :ON  
FRAMERATE :ON  
VERSIONID :ON  
:S+IRIS  
:ON  
:OFF  
<VTRVFINDICATOR>  
n
TAPE(IND)  
BATTERY(IND)  
:ON  
:ON  
LEVELMETER(IND) :CH1  
AUDIOIN(IND)  
TC(IND)  
:OFF  
:OFF  
VTRWARNING(IND) :NORMAL  
COMPRESSION(IND) :ON  
SAVELED  
:SAVE  
<VTRVFINDICATOR>  
n
TAPE(IND)  
BATTERY(IND)  
:ON  
:ON  
LEVELMETER(IND) :CH1  
AUDIOIN(IND)  
TC(IND)  
:OFF  
:OFF  
VTRWARNING(IND) :NORMAL  
COMPRESSION(IND) :ON  
SAVELED  
:SAVE  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the desired item.  
2
3
For the selected item, press the JOG dial button,  
and set whether or not the item is to be displayed  
on the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select display (ON) or  
no display (OFF), and press the JOG dial button to  
enter the selection.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set ON or OFF for other  
4
5
items.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
47  
Viewfinder screen status displays (continued)  
Display modes and setting  
change messages  
The display of messages advising the user of what  
changes have been made to the settings and what the  
adjustment results are can be turned off for some or  
all of the items displayed.  
Setting change/adjustment result messages and display modes  
Display mode  
setting  
Situation in which message is displayed  
Message  
1
2
3
When the filter selection has been changed  
When the gain setting has been changed  
Filter: n (n=1, 2, 3, 4), m (m=A, B, C, D)  
t
t
GAIN: n dB  
(n= –6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30)  
t
t
t
t
When the WHITE BAL switch setting has been WHITE: n (n=ACH, BCH, PRESET)  
changed  
When the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch has  
been set to AUTO KNEE or OFF  
<Note>  
This display is shown for about 3 seconds  
immediately after the unit’s power has been  
switched on.  
AUTO KNEE: ON (or OFF)  
t
When the shutter speed/mode setting has been SS: 1/100 (or 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
changed  
S.SCAN, 3.0d to 350.0d, 0.8% to 97.2%)  
t
t
t
When the white balance (AWB) has been  
adjusted  
Example) AWB: OK  
For details, refer to “Adjusting the white balance”  
(pages 53 to 55).  
When the black balance (ABB) has been  
adjusted  
Example) ABB: OK  
For details, refer to “Adjusting the black balance”  
(page 56).  
: Message is to be displayed.  
t : Message is not to be  
displayed.  
48  
Viewfinder screen status displays (continued)  
Switching the display mode  
Setting the marker displays  
The display mode settings are switched on the VF  
DISPLAY screen.  
The center marker and safety zone marker displays  
are set on the VF MARKER screen.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88) to  
open the “VF DISPLAY” screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88) to  
open the “VF MARKER” screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2.  
1
1
<VFDISPLAY>  
n
<VFMARKER>  
n
DISPCONDITION  
DISPMODE  
VFOUT  
:NORMAL  
:3  
:Y  
SAFETYZONE :3  
CENTERMARK :ON  
FRAMESIG  
MARK  
:4:3  
:OFF  
:15  
VFDTL  
:4  
ZEBRA1DETECT  
ZEBRA2DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
:080%  
:085%  
:SPOT  
:45%  
LVL  
LOWLIGHTLVL  
SYNCHROSCANDISP.:deg  
ECUMENUDISP. :ON  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “DISP MODE” item.  
Perform the same operations as for the “VF  
DISPLAY” screen to set each item.  
2
3
2
Press the JOG dial button, and set the desired  
display mode.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select the display  
contents, and press the JOG dial button to enter  
the selection.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4
49  
Viewfinder screen status displays (continued)  
Setting the camera ID  
The camera ID is set on the CAMERA ID screen.  
Up to ten alphanumerics, symbols and spaces can be  
used.  
<Note>  
The camera ID is not displayed while the setting menu  
is displayed even if color bar signals are output.  
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed  
is switched in the following sequence:  
4
Space: )  
7
letters: A—Z  
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88) to  
open the “CAMERA ID” screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2.  
1
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –  
<CAMERAID>  
n
2222222222  
ID1:  
ID2:  
ID3:  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
5
6
2222222222  
2222222222  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the next position (right), and repeat  
steps 4 and 5 to set the characters.  
When the characters have been input, turn the  
JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
“:” position.  
7
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “ID 1: to 3:” item.  
2
3
<CAMERAID>  
m
<CAMERAID>  
2222222222  
2222222222  
2222222222  
ID1:  
ID2:  
ID3:  
2222222222  
2222222222  
2222222222  
ID1:  
ID2:  
ID3:  
n
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) returns to the ID 1:, ID 2: or ID 3: item.  
8
9
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) moves to the ID input area, and the input  
mode is established.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
<CAMERAID>  
m
2222222222  
2222222222  
2222222222  
ID1:  
ID2:  
ID3:  
<Note>  
The camera ID is recorded at the same time as the  
color bar signals if “CAMERA ID” on the VF  
INDICATOR screen has been set to “ON.”  
50  
Screen displays  
Remaining battery charge and  
audio channel level and  
remaining tape displays  
Displays relating to time codes  
These displays light for the time code, CTL and actual  
time  
DF  
: Drop frame mode  
SLAVE : External locking of the time code  
HOLD : Time code generator in the hold mode (when the  
HOLD button has been pressed)  
Remaining tape display  
The remaining tape time is displayed using 7 segments.  
The remaining tape time indicated by each segment is set  
to 3 minutes or 5 minutes using TAPE REMAIN/ $ on the  
VTR MENU “BATTERY/TAPE” screen. Each time the  
number of minutes set for the segments elapses, one  
segment is cleared. (See page 117)  
EMPHASIS  
DF SLAVE TCG HOLD  
0
10  
h
min  
s
frm  
EMPHASIS  
DF SLAVE TCG HOLD  
0
TAPE  
20  
E
F
10  
30  
40  
h
min  
s
frm  
BATT  
TAPE  
20  
-dB  
RF SERVO HUMID SLACK  
CH1  
CH2  
E
F
30  
40  
BATT  
Time counter display  
This displays the time code, CTL, user bits and actual  
time. For the correlation between the items displayed and  
the switches, refer to the next section.  
-dB  
RF SERVO HUMID SLACK  
CH1  
CH2  
Remaining battery charge display  
If a battery with a digital display (% display) is used, all 7  
segments up to the “F” position light when the 70% or  
more of the battery charge remains.  
When there is less than 70% of the battery charge  
remaining, the segments go out one by one in sequence  
every time the remaining charge drops by 10%.  
Time code-related switch settings and display  
items  
TCG switch  
position  
DISPLAY switch  
position  
Display item  
Time code  
User bits  
CTL  
Audio channel level meter  
TC or CTL  
UB  
SET  
Displays relating to errors and  
warnings  
CTL  
F-RUN or R-RUN  
TC  
Time code  
User bits  
Error code display  
EMPHASIS  
DF SLAVE TCG HOLD  
UB  
0
10  
<Note>  
h
min  
s
frm  
If the HOLD button is pressed while the DISPLAY  
switch is set to UB, “HOLD” on the counter display will  
flash for as long as the switch is held down, and the  
VITC user bits information recorded in the video AUX  
area will appear on the counter display.  
TAPE  
20  
E
F
30  
40  
BATT  
-dB  
RF SERVO HUMID SLACK  
Warning displays  
CH1  
CH2  
RF : Clogged video head  
SERVO: Servo disturbance  
HUMID : Formation of condensation on the head drum  
SLACK: Problem in tape take-up  
For details, refer to “Warning system” (pages 126 and  
127).  
51  
Adjusting the date and time  
Adjustments and setup using  
the setting menus  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “TIME/DATE” screen of VTR MAIN  
MENU.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
1
5
<TIME/DATE>  
n
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
HOUR  
MINUTE  
:02  
:01  
:01  
:00  
:00  
<Note>  
The seconds cannot be set. The time always  
advances from 0 seconds.  
$TIME/DATESET  
Turn the JOG dial button to select the item to be  
changed, and press the JOG dial button.  
2
<TIME/DATE>  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
HOUR  
MINUTE  
:02  
:01  
:01  
:00  
:00  
n
$TIME/DATESET  
Turn the JOG dial button to change the setting,  
and press the JOG dial button to enter the setting.  
3
4
When the settings are completed, turn the JOG  
dial button to select $ TIME/DATE SET, and press  
the JOG dial button.  
<TIME/DATE>  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
HOUR  
MINUTE  
:02  
:01  
:01  
:00  
:00  
$TIME/DATESET  
n
52  
Adjusting the white balance and black balance  
Adjusting the white balance  
Preset white balance  
Set the switches as shown in the figure.  
1
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST. The white  
balance for the selected filter is now obtained in  
accordance with the position where the FILTER  
control (outer) has been set.  
If the preset white balance is to be left unchanged for  
use, skip ahead to “Adjusting the black balance” (page  
56).  
White balance adjustments using the  
WHITE BAL: A or B  
AWB function  
OUTPUT: CAM  
FILTER control  
A better picture can be achieved by adjusting the  
white balance and black balance in the following  
sequence: AWB (white balance adjustment) 5 ABB  
(black balance adjustment) 5 AWB.  
GAIN: Normally 0 dB  
Set to a more suitable gain level if it is  
too dark.  
There is usually no need to re-adjust the black  
balance even when the power has been turned off  
and back on.  
The white balance must always be re-adjusted when  
the lighting conditions have changed.  
If the display mode is set to “2” or “3,” messages  
advising the user of what progress has been made in  
the adjustments and what the adjustment results are  
appear on the viewfinder screen when the black  
balance or white balance adjustment is commenced.  
Set the display mode to “1” if these messages are not  
to be displayed.  
OFor details on the display mode settings, refer to  
“Display modes and setting change messages”  
(page 48).  
When the GAIN and WHITE BAL switch settings  
are changed, messages advising the user of the  
set positions appear on the setting change  
message display of the viewfinder screen.  
(However, this happens only when “3” has been  
set as the display mode.)  
Select the FILTER control setting in accordance  
with the lighting conditions.  
OFor examples of the FILTER control settings,  
refer to the description of the FILTER control  
(page 14) in the “Shooting (recording)/playback  
function section.”  
2
When the FILTER control setting is changed, a  
message advising the user of the set positions  
appears on the setting change message display  
<Notes>  
OABB must be performed when the MASTER GAIN  
levels have been changed on the LOW SETTING,  
MID SETTING and HIGH SETTING screens of the  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1, when the super gain  
setting has been changed using the USER button,  
and when the GAMMA (ON/OFF) has been  
switched on the CAMERA SETTING screen.  
OWith artificial lighting—particularly fluorescent lights  
and mercury lamps—the luminance may appear to  
be constant but the intensity of the R, G and B  
colors will change in synchronization with the power  
line frequency. Especially in regions with a 50 Hz  
power line frequency, mutual interference arises  
between the vertical sync frequency (approx. 60  
Hz) of this unit and lighting frequency (50 Hz). As a  
result, the hue tends to change with the passage of  
time or flickering occurs, making it impossible to  
achieve a proper white balance.  
of the viewfinder screen.  
happens only when “3” has been set as the  
display mode.)  
(However, this  
It is recommended that the white balance be  
achieved using the settings shown in the table  
below.  
Power line frequency  
Shutter speed  
1/100  
50 Hz  
60 Hz  
OFF  
53  
Adjusting the white balance and black balance (continued)  
Adjusting the white balance  
Erect a white pattern at a place with the same  
conditions as the source of light illuminating the  
subject, zoom in, and shoot the white of the pattern  
on the screen.  
While the adjustment is in progress, the following  
3
6
message appears on the viewfinder screen (but  
only when “2” or “3” has been set as the display  
mode).  
A white object (such as a white cloth or white wall)  
near the subject may be used as a substitute for  
the white pattern.  
AWBACTIVE  
The size of the white object required is shown in  
the figure below.  
Message appearing while the adjustment is in  
progress  
At least one-fourth of  
the screen width  
Adjustment is completed in several seconds. (A  
message similar to the one shown in the figure  
now appears.)  
7
The adjustment value is automatically saved in the  
memory (A or B) which was set in step 1.  
At least one-fourth of  
the screen height  
AWBAOK3.2K  
Message appearing upon completion of the  
adjustment  
<Notes>  
OTake care to keep high-brightness spots off the screen.  
OShoot white objects in the center of the screen.  
A message such as the following appears if the  
color temperature of the subject is lower than 2300  
K or higher than 5600 K.  
The downward pointing arrow indicates that the  
color temperature is lower than the display  
temperature; conversely, the upward pointing  
arrow indicates that the it is higher than the display  
temperature.  
8
Adjust the lens aperture.  
4
5
Set the AUTO W/B BAL switch to AWB, and then  
release it.  
The switch returns to the center, and the white  
balance is automatically adjusted.  
AWBAOK2.3K  
m
When the color temperature is lower than 2300 K  
m
AWBAOK5.6K  
When the color temperature is higher than 5600 K  
<Note>  
When a zoom lens with an automatic aperture  
function is used, aperture hunting may occur. Adjust  
the aperture’s gain control (marked as IG, IS, S, etc.)  
provided with the lens.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions which  
accompany the lens.  
AUTO W/B BAL switch  
<Note>  
When the AUTO W/B BAL switch is pressed again to  
the AWB side when the white balance is being  
adjusted automatically (AWB ACTIVE), the  
adjustment operation will stop.  
Hunting:  
The auto iris response is repeated, causing the brightness levels  
of the image to become inconsistent.  
The adjusted value in this case is the value before  
automatic adjustment was performed.  
54  
Adjusting the white balance and black balance (continued)  
Adjusting the white balance  
When the white balance cannot  
automatically be adjusted  
White balance memories  
There are two sets of white balance memories, A and  
B.  
An error message appears on the viewfinder screen  
(when “2” or “3” has been set as the display mode).  
When the FILTER INH setting on the CAMERA SW  
MODE screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4 is ON  
(default setting), the number of memories for set A  
and set B is limited to one each. In this case, the  
memory contents are not coupled with the filter.  
When FILTER INH is set to OFF, the adjustment  
values for each filter can be automatically saved in the  
memories corresponding to the WHITE BAL switch  
settings (A or B). This unit contains four filters so that  
a total of 8 (4a2) adjustment values are saved.  
Messages relating to white balance adjustment  
Error  
message  
Meaning  
Recommended action  
COLOR TEMP. Color temperature is too Select a suitable filter.  
HIGH high.  
COLOR TEMP. Color temperature is too Select a suitable filter.  
LOW  
low.  
LOW LIGHT  
There is not enough  
light.  
Increase the amount of  
light or increase the  
gain.  
White balance search area  
LEVEL OVER There is too much light. Reduce the amount of  
light or reduce the gain.  
It is possible to set the white balance search area to  
either 90%, 50% or 25% by changing the AWB AREA  
setting on the OPTION screen of the FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 4.  
UNSTABLE  
CONDITION  
The shooting conditions If flickering is to blame,  
are unstable (shooting install the shutter, and  
under fluorescent light, stabilize the shooting  
unstable camera  
posture, etc.).  
conditions.  
CHECK  
FILTER  
The setting position of  
the filter selector control control.  
is not correct.  
Check the filter selector  
90%  
50%  
When any of the error messages listed above is  
displayed, take the recommended action, and try  
adjusting the white balance again.  
25%  
If the error message persists even after repeated  
attempts, consult your dealer.  
<Note>  
When using the unit in film mode  
When there is a large difference between the CC filter  
setting and the color temperature of the subject, the  
dynamic range of the video signals may not be utilized  
to full potential.  
On rare occasions, AWB cannot be adjusted and a  
NG display appears. In a case like this, adjust AWB  
again.  
We recommend that the CC filter setting selected is  
one that is close to the color temperature of the  
subject.  
55  
Adjusting the white balance and black balance (continued)  
Adjusting the black balance  
The black balance needs to be adjusted in the  
following cases:  
While the adjustment is in progress, the following  
3
4
message appears on the viewfinder screen (but  
only when “2” or “3” has been set as the display  
mode).  
OWhen the unit is used for the first time  
OWhen the unit is used after it has not been used for  
a prolonged period of time  
OWhen the unit is used in an ambient temperature  
which has fluctuated significantly  
OWhen the value selected for the gain switch has  
been changed  
OWhen the super gain setting has been performed  
using the USER button  
<Note>  
While the adjustment is in progress, the lens  
aperture is automatically set to CLOSE.  
ABBACTIVE  
Message appearing while the adjustment is in  
progress  
OWhen the gamma ON/OFF setting has been  
changed  
OWhen the frame rate setting has been changed  
Adjustment is completed in several seconds. (A  
message similar to the one shown in the figure  
now appears.)  
The adjustment value is automatically saved in the  
memory.  
Set the switches as shown in the figure.  
1
ABBOK  
Message appearing upon completion of the  
adjustment  
<Notes>  
OWhen using a lens with an auto aperture, check  
that the lens connector has been connected.  
OWhen using a lens with an auto aperture, the  
aperture will be automatically set to where the light  
is blocked while the black balance is being  
adjusted.  
OUTPUT: CAM  
OWhen using a lens with a manual aperture, the  
aperture must be fully stopped down first before the  
black balance is adjusted.  
Set the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the ABB position,  
and then release it.  
The switch returns to the center, and the  
adjustment is performed.  
2
OWhile the black balance is being adjusted, the gain  
selector circuit is switched automatically.  
Flicker or noise may appear on the viewfinder  
screen, but this is not indicative of malfunctioning.  
OIf black shading is not satisfactory even with ABB  
OK, open the BLACK SHADING screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4, and adjust the black  
shading. (Refer to page 111.)  
OWhen the super gain has been set to ON, the black  
balance is executed at the preset position in the  
white balance memory.  
OWhen the AUTO W/B BAL switch is pressed again  
to the ABB side when the black balance is being  
adjusted automatically (ABB ACTIVE), the  
adjustment operation will stop.  
The adjusted value in this case is the value before  
automatic adjustment was performed.  
AUTO W/B switch  
56  
Setting the electronic shutter  
Shutter modes  
Registering the shutter speed  
Available shutter modes and shutter speeds  
The shutter speed is registered in the “SHUTTER  
SELECT” screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2.  
Mode  
Fixed  
Shutter speed  
Application  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “SHUTTER SELECT” screen.  
1
POSITION 1 to 6  
For shooting fast-moving  
subjects clearly  
<SHUTTERSELECT>  
n
SYNCHROSCAN2  
POSITION1  
POSITION2  
POSITION3  
POSITION4  
POSITION5  
POSITION6  
:180deg  
:1/100  
:1/120  
:1/250  
:1/500  
:1/1000  
:1/2000  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN  
Aperture angle: 3 to For shooting in such a way  
350 degrees that the horizontal striping is  
(0.8% to 97.2% of the minimized on the monitor  
frame rate) screen  
<Notes>  
ONo matter in which mode the electronic shutter is  
used, the higher the shutter speed, the lower the  
camera’s sensitivity.  
OWhen the aperture is in the automatic mode, it will  
increasingly open and the depth of focus will  
become shallower as the shutter speed is  
increased.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the desired item.  
2
3
Press the JOG dial button to set the shutter speed  
to be changed.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select ON or OFF, and  
press the button to enter the setting.  
It is possible to set a fixed speed within the range  
of 90.0 to 225.0 degrees (in units of 0.5 deg.) in  
SYNCHRO SCAN 2.  
It is also possible to set 6 different shutter speeds  
in POSITION 1 to 6, respectively.  
1/100 , 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000 and 1/2000 sec.  
(or 180.0, 172.8, 144.0, 120.0, 90.0 and 45.0 deg)  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4
57  
Setting the electronic shutter (continued)  
Setting the shutter mode and  
speed  
Changing the shutter speed  
and mode selection range  
OThe SHUTTER switch is used to set the shutter  
speed and the shutter speed in the fixed mode.  
OThe shutter speed in the SYNCHRO SCAN 1 mode  
can easily be changed using the SYNCHRO (“+”  
On the SHUTTER SPEED screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2, the setting range of the shutter speed  
can be restricted to the required range and whether or  
not to use the special operation mode (SYNCHRO  
SCAN) can be selected.  
and “–”) buttons.  
OOn the SHUTTER SPEED screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2, the setting range of the shutter  
speed can be restricted to the required range and  
whether or not to use the special operation mode  
(SYNCHRO SCAN) can be selected.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “SHUTTER SPEED” screen.  
1
<SHUTTERSPEED>  
n
SYNCHROSCAN1  
SYNCHROSCAN2  
POSITION1  
POSITION2  
POSITION3  
POSITION4  
POSITION5  
POSITION6  
:ON  
:OFF  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
Following the steps for “Switching the display  
1
mode” (page 49), set DISP MODE to “2” or “3” on  
the VF DISPLAY screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN  
MENU 2.  
Press the SHUTTER switch from ON to SEL.  
2
The current shutter setting appears on the setting  
change message display area of the viewfinder  
screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the desired item.  
2
3
Example: “1/120,” “50.0%,” etc.  
Press the JOG dial button to set the item to be  
changed.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select ON or OFF, and  
press the button to enter the setting.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4
<Notes>  
SHUTTER switch  
OWhen operating the unit from the AJ-EC3 extension  
control unit (optional accessory), the shutter speed  
selected by the AJ-EC3 switch will take precedence  
in determining the actual shutter speed even when  
operations have been performed on the unit’s  
SHUTTER SPEED screen.  
OFor details on selecting the engineer mode and  
display screens, refer to “Menu operations” (pages  
86 to 88).  
Press the SHUTTER switch to the SEL position  
again, and repeat this until the desired mode or  
speed is displayed.  
When all the modes and speeds are displayed, the  
display will change in the sequence shown below.  
When the required shutter speed and mode have  
been assigned beforehand, only the assigned  
speed or mode will be displayed.  
3
Fixed mode  
POSITION1  
POSITION2  
POSITION3  
POSITION4  
POSITION5  
POSITION6  
SYNCHRO SCAN 2  
SYNCHRO SCAN 1  
58  
Setting the electronic shutter (continued)  
Setting the synchro scan 1 mode Switching the synchro scan  
shutter speed display  
Push the SHUTTER switch from ON toward SEL  
1
The unit enables the SYNCHRO SCAN mode to be  
displayed on the viewfinder screen to be switched to  
“1/¢¢¢ (sec.),” “¢¢¢%” or “¢¢¢d (angle)” on the  
VF DISPLAY screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2.  
for as many times as necessary for the shutter  
speed display on the viewfinder screen to appear  
as “SS:1 ¢¢.¢deg.” (¢ is replaced with a  
figuare.)  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and open the VF DISPLAY screen.  
1
<VFDISPLAY>  
n
DISPCONDITION  
DISPMODE  
VFOUT  
:NORMAL  
:3  
:Y  
VFDTL  
:4  
ZEBRA1DETECT  
ZEBRA2DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
:070%  
:085%  
:SPOT  
:45%  
LOWLIGHTLVL  
SYNCHROSCANDISP.:deg  
ECUMENUDISP. :ON  
SHUTTER switch  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SYNCHRO SCAN DISP. item.  
2
In the SYNCHRO SCAN 1 mode, continuous  
switching inside the 3.0 deg to 350.0 deg (0.8% to  
97.2%) range can be achieved by pressing the  
SYNCHRO (“+” and “–”) buttons.  
2
<VFDISPLAY>  
DISPCONDITION  
DISPMODE  
:NORMAL  
:3  
VFOUT  
VFDTL  
:Y  
:4  
ZEBRA1DETECT  
ZEBRA2DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
:070%  
:085%  
:SPOT  
:45%  
LOWLIGHTLVL  
SYNCHROSCANDISP.:deg  
n
ECUMENUDISP.  
:ON  
Press the JOG dial button to set the SYNCHRO  
SCAN display mode.  
Turn the JOG dial button, select the display, and  
then press the JOG dial button to enter the  
selection.  
3
4
sec (seconds): 1/¢¢¢  
%
: ¢¢¢%  
deg (angle) : ¢¢¢d  
e.g.  
When the frame rate is set to 24 fps and exposure  
time is set to half:  
1/48 sec = 50% = 180 deg.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
59  
Film tone gamma function  
The unit incorporates a total of three gamma curves—  
Film mode (FILM MENU)  
two cine curves (for films/for videos) and the  
conventional video gamma curve—and it enables the  
curve that best suits the application at hand to be  
selected.  
Two types of film-like images can be achieved in this  
mode.  
FILM REC (for films: film gamma)  
This is the optimum mode for printing the images  
recorded on tape onto film and presenting them.  
The images are processed using the film-use cine  
gamma characteristics developed by Panasonic.  
VIDEO REC (for videos: film tone gamma)  
Even when playing back images recorded on tape  
using a video component, this mode provides a  
wide dynamic range, enabling images to be played  
back in a mode where the images are more like film  
images than the conventional video images.  
The images are processed using the video-use cine  
gamma characteristics developed by Panasonic.  
Switching from the film mode to video mode or vice  
versa can be accomplished using the CAM MENU  
SEL item on the OPTION screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 4.  
Two gamma curves (for films/for videos) are available  
in the film mode. They can be set by selecting the  
CINE GAMMA SEL item on the GAMMA screen of  
FILM MAIN MENU 1.  
Video mode (VIDEO MENU)  
The images are processed using the conventional  
video gamma characteristics.  
The menu settings performed in the film mode and  
video mode are saved separately.  
Switching the frame frequency  
This unit allows the frame frequency to be switched to  
Press the JOG dial button to set the item to be  
used.  
Turn it to select the frequency, and then press it to  
enter the selection.  
3
60.00 Hz or 59.94 Hz to provide support in areas with  
different video systems. The frame frequency can be  
switched on the OPTION screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN  
MENU 4.  
At this time, the  
message  
TURN OFF POWER  
flashes on the display.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and open the OPTION screen.  
1
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4
5
<OPTION>  
n
ENGSECURITY  
SHD,ABBSWCTRL:ON  
AWBAREA :50%  
AWB&ABBOFFSET:OFF  
CAMMENUSEL  
SYSTEMFREQ.  
EVFSEL  
:OFF  
:FILMMENU  
:59.94Hz  
:MONO  
SUPERDTL  
:OFF  
Set the POWER switch to OFF to turn off the  
power.  
The frame frequency will be switched when it is  
turned back on.  
Press the MODE CHECK button to check that the  
frame frequency has been switched.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SYSTEM FREQ item.  
2
60  
Variable frame rate  
This camera-recorder enables the frame rate  
(shooting speed) to be set from 4 fps to 60 fps.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4
Since the 720P/59.94 Hz or 720P/60.00 Hz format is  
used for recording onto the tape or outputting to the  
HD SDI MON connector and the HD SDI EE  
connector , users now have the exciting opportunity to  
create a whole new dimension of moving images with  
clearer slow-motion images and blur effects—a world  
which was hitherto confined to the field of film  
production—in their own video productions.  
Using the synchro scan adjustment switches  
(“+” and “–”)  
Set the unit to a status other than the menu  
operation status.  
This unit automatically stores as the tape  
management information both the frame rate  
information which indicates the shooting speed and  
the active frame information which indicates the first  
frame where the frame image was switched in the  
user bits of the sub-code track area (this used to be  
the LTC area). This information is output from the TC  
OUT connector, HD SDI MON connector and HD SDI  
EE connector. Further, the active frame information is  
stored in the least significant digit of the user bits  
while the frame rate information is stored in its lower  
third and fourth digits.  
1
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the frame  
rate information display at the top left of the  
viewfinder screen starts flashing.  
2
24 1/250 S  
EX2  
10min 14.6V  
/46 BP402  
Setting the frame rate  
There are three ways in which the frame rate can be  
set.  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
iREC  
!D.L.  
1B A 12dB  
F5.6 Z99  
Using menu operations  
Press the synchro scan adjustment switches (“+”  
and “–”) to set the desired frame rate.  
<Note>  
After about 5 seconds, the frame rate information  
display stops flashing and lights. Press the  
synchro scan adjustment switches (“+” and “–”)  
while this display is flashing.  
3
4
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “FRAME MODE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 2.  
1
<FRAMEMODE>  
n
FRAMERATERANGE :60-12  
FRAMERATE  
SCANREVERSE  
:24  
:OFF  
USERSWFRAMERATE:24  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the frame rate.  
Refrain from further operation, and in about 5  
seconds the frame rate information display on the  
viewfinder screen will stop flashing, and the frame  
rate will be set.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “FRAME RATE” item.  
<Note>  
2
3
When the frame rate has been changed, adjust the  
black balance once again.  
Press the JOG dial button, and set the desired  
frame rate.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select the frame rate,  
and press the JOG dial button to enter the  
selection.  
61  
Variable frame rate (continued)  
Setting the frame rate using the USER1 or USER2  
button  
Press the MENU button to end the menu  
operations.  
8
9
After setting your desired frame rate with the USER  
(USER1 or USER2) button through menu operations,  
you can shoot with the set frame rate simply by  
pressing the USER button.  
You can recover the previous frame rate by pressing  
the USER button again.  
When the USER button is pressed in the rec-pause  
mode or stop mode, the frame rate is switched to  
the rate you have set. When you press the USER  
button again, the previous frame rate is retrieved.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “FRAME MODE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 2.  
1
OIf you press the USER button during recording,  
the frame rate will not be changed to the set rate.  
OWhile the frame rate can be changed by the  
USER button operation, you cannot change the  
frame rate by pressing the JOG dial button and  
then a SYNCHRO (“+” or “–”) button.  
<FRAMEMODE>  
n
FRAMERATERANGE :60-12  
FRAMERATE  
SCANREVERSE  
USERSWFRAMERATE:24  
:24  
:OFF  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “USER SW FRAME RATE” item.  
2
3
Press the JOG dial button for setting the frame  
rate.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select a frame rate (12  
fps to 60 fps) and then press the JOG dial button to  
enter the setting.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the <FRAME MODE> screen title and  
then press the JOG dial button.  
4
5
6
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the <CAMERA SW MODE> screen title  
and then press the JOG dial button.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “USER1 SW” or “USER2 SW” item.  
<CAMERASWMODE>  
FILTERINH  
SHOCKLESSAWB  
COLORBARS  
S.GAINOFF  
USER1SW  
USER2SW  
S.BLKLVL  
:ON  
:OFF  
:FULLBARS  
:L/M/H  
:INH  
:YGET  
:OFF  
n
ECUDATASAVE  
AUTOKNEESW  
:OFF  
:OFF  
Turn the JOG dial button until “F.RATE” is  
displayed and then press the JOG dial button to  
enter the setting.  
7
62  
Variable frame rate (continued)  
<Notes>  
3Disturbed images  
In this unit, the frame rate is set by changing the  
storage time of the optical signals sensed by the CCD.  
Depending on the frame rate setting, the following  
problems may arise.  
The images may be disturbed for an instant when  
shooting while maintaining the frame-to-frame  
continuity of the scenes with the time code set to  
the rec run mode and with the frame rate set at 24  
fps, 25 fps, 30 fps or 50 fps.  
1White blemish  
This occurs in order to reset the video signals from  
the camera so as to maintain the continuity of the  
time code recorded on the tape.  
The disturbed images are not recorded on the tape  
but they will affect the signals which are output from  
the HD SDI MON connector.  
Similarly, the images may also be disturbed for an  
instant when the time code has been locked to  
external signals or preset while the frame rate is set  
at 24 fps, 25 fps, 30 fps or 50 fps.  
If the time code has been set to the free run mode,  
the images may also be disturbed at that instant  
when the frame rate is switched to 24 fps, 25 fps,  
30 fps or 50 fps.  
White blemishes may be seen on the screen on  
account of the fluctuations in the dark current of the  
photodiodes which make up the CCD picture  
elements.  
This current increases in direct  
proportion to the rise in the CCD’s temperature and  
storage time in the photodiode.  
In short, the white blemish increase in inverse  
proportion to the frame rate setting.  
When a lower frame rate setting is desired, reduce  
the master gain setting and, where possible, avoid  
direct sunlight and use the unit in a cool  
environment.  
When using this unit particularly at a low frame rate  
of 11 fps or less, the extremely small white streaks  
generated by the CCD are minimized using a  
special method. For this reason, when subjects  
with extremely small bright spots are shot, these  
spots may appear less bright.  
However, the images will not be disturbed  
during recording even if the frame rate is  
switched to 24 fps, 25 fps, 30 fps or 50 fps.  
2Delayed response time in automatic processing  
When the frame rate setting has been lowered, it  
takes longer for the unit to perform the automatic  
processing (such as auto white balance, flare  
compensation, auto knee and auto iris), possibly  
giving the user the impression that something is  
odd or wrong.  
The response time for automatic processes is  
particularly slow at a frame rate of 20 fps and  
below.  
When the frame rate has been set to 20 fps or  
below, it is recommended that the unit be operated  
with the automatic processing released.  
63  
Scan reverse  
Using an HD lens adapter made by Angenieux, this  
unit supports the ultra-prime lenses used for film  
cameras as a standard feature. Furthermore, it can  
also select the setting of the scan reverse function for  
canceling the image correction (reversal of the  
top/bottom and left/right of the images) that is  
performed when this adapter is used.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “SCAN REVERSE” item.  
2
3
Press the JOG dial button, and set the desired  
scan reverse.  
Turn the JOG dial button, ON or OFF and press  
the JOG dial button to enter the selection.  
Setting the scan reverse  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
1
and display the “FRAME MODE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 2.  
<FRAMEMODE>  
n
FRAMERATERANGE :60-12  
FRAMERATE  
SCANREVERSE  
:24  
:OFF  
USERSWFRAMERATE:24  
Adjusting the audio level  
When the AUTO SELECT CH1 and CH2 selector  
switches are set to AUTO, the audio CH1 and CH2  
input levels are adjusted automatically.  
Proceed as follows to adjust the audio channel 1 and  
2 levels manually.  
AUDIO LEVEL  
CH1 control  
AUDIO LEVEL  
CH2 control  
Manual audio level adjustments  
AUTO SELECT CH1  
selector switch  
Set the AUTO SELECT CH1 and CH2 selector  
switches to MAN.  
1
AUTO SELECT CH2  
selector switch  
Adjust the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2 controls in  
2
such a way that, when audio signals are input, the  
level meter reading will not exceed 0 dBu even  
under maximum signal input level conditions.  
Limiter  
When the audio levels have been adjusted manually,  
the limiter circuit is tripped by an excessively high  
input level. This circuit can be turned ON or OFF on  
the MIC/AUDIO screen of the VTR menu.  
(The factory setting is OFF.)  
64  
Setting the time data  
When the user bits and time code are both to be used,  
the user bits are set first.  
If the time code is set first, the time code generator  
will stop while the user bits are being set so that the  
time code setting will be off.  
User bits memory function  
The user bits settings (except for the actual time) are  
automatically saved in the memory and retained even  
after the power is turned off.  
The time code setting range extends from 00:00:00:00  
to 23:59:59:29.  
<Notes>  
OIn the camera image recording mode, the tape  
management information shown on page 68 is  
output.  
OWhen DATE is selected from the UB MODE items,  
the real time operations for year/month/day of the  
TIME/DATE screen are adhered to.  
OWhen TIME is selected from the UB MODE items,  
the real time operations for hours/minutes/seconds  
of the TIME/DATE screen are adhered to.  
OThe user bits setting contents are output to the six  
higher digits of the user bits in the VIDEO AUX area  
(which used to be the VITC area). In the internal  
color bar signal recording mode, they are also  
output to the six higher digits of the LTC user bits.  
OThe user bits cannot be set since the active frame  
information and other tape management  
information is always output to the two lower digits  
of the user bits.  
Setting the user bits  
In the internal color bar signal recording mode,  
memos (dates and times) of up to six hexadecimal  
digits can be recorded on the sub-code track by  
setting the user bits.  
Set the OUTPUT (output signal selector)/AUTO  
KNEE switch to BARS.  
1
Set the DISPLAY switch to UB.  
2
Set the TCG switch to SET.  
3
Set the user bits using the SHIFT button, “+” button  
and “–” button.  
SHIFT button:  
4
This is used to start the digit to be set flashing.  
Each time it is pressed, the flashing moves by  
one digit to the right.  
2
“+” button:  
This increments by 1 the numerical value of the  
flashing digit.  
“–” button:  
3,5  
This decrements by 1 the numerical value of the  
flashing digit.  
A to F in hexadecimal notation are displayed as follows:  
Hexadecimal  
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
notation  
Display  
1
Set the TCG switch to F-RUN or R-RUN.  
5
6
Select UB MODE item on the TC/UB screen of  
VTR MENU.  
65  
Setting the time data (continued)  
Setting the time code  
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
1
Set the TCG switch to SET.  
2
1
Switch the TC MODE to DF or NDF on the TC/UB  
screen of VTR MENU.  
Select DF to run the time code in the drop frame  
mode or select NDF to run the time code in the  
non-drop frame mode.  
3
2,5  
Set the time code using the SHIFT button, “+”  
button and “–” button.  
SHIFT button:  
4
4
This is used to start the digit to be set flashing.  
Each time it is pressed, the flashing moves by  
one digit to the right.  
“+” button:  
Time code when the battery is replaced  
This increments by 1 the numerical value of the  
flashing digit.  
“–” button:  
The backup function works even when the battery is  
replaced, and the time code generator continues to  
operate for a prolonged duration (approx. 1 year).  
This decrements by 1 the numerical value of the  
flashing digit.  
<Note>  
When the POWER switch is set to ON 5 OFF 5  
ON, the backup accuracy of the time code is  
approximately 2 frames.  
Select the TCG switch position.  
5
Select F-RUN for running the time code in the free-  
run mode or select R-RUN for running it in the rec-  
run mode.  
Set the number of frames per seconds (24, 25 or  
6
30) displayed in the frame digits of the time code  
using the TC DISP SEL item on the TC/UB screen  
of VTR MENU.  
The time code is converted to the number of  
frames which has been set here, and displayed.  
<Notes>  
OWhen the frame rate is set to 24 fps, this unit will  
perform the processing in the non-drop frame mode  
in order to maintain the continuity of the frames  
even when the time code has been set to the drop  
frame mode.  
Furthermore, when the frame rate has been set to  
24 fps, it will not be possible to set the time code  
while recording is in progress since the images will  
be disturbed if the advancing of the time code is  
discontinuous.  
OWhen the frame frequency has been set to 60.00  
Hz, the unit always performs the processing in the  
non-drop frame mode.  
66  
Setting the time data (continued)  
<Note>  
Externally locking the time code  
When the external lock operation is performed, the  
time code is instantly locked to the external time code,  
and the same value as the external code value  
appears on the counter display.  
Set the POWER switch to ON.  
1
Do not set the unit to the recording mode during the  
few seconds it takes for the sync generator to  
stabilize.  
Set the TCG switch to F-RUN.  
2
3
4
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
User bits setting when the time code is externally  
locked  
When the time code is externally locked, only the time  
data is locked to the time data of the external time  
code.  
Supply the reference time code and reference  
video signal which are in a phase relationship that  
satisfies the time code standard to the TC IN  
connector and GENLOCK IN connector  
respectively.  
This means that the user bits can be set separately for  
each unit.  
The user bits can also be locked to the user bits of the  
external time code. For details, consult your dealer.  
To release the external lock  
First stop supplying the external time code, and set  
the TCG switch to R-RUN.  
3
2
When switching the power from the battery to an  
external power supply while the time code is  
externally locked  
In order to ensure the continuity of the time code  
generator’s power, connect the external power supply  
to the DC IN connector, and then remove the battery  
pack. If the battery pack is removed first, no  
guarantees can be made for the continuity of the  
external locking of the time code.  
1
Gen-locking of the camera unit while the time  
code is externally locked  
Example of connections for external  
lock  
While the time code is externally locked, the camera  
unit is gen-locked by the reference video signal which  
is supplied to the GEN LOCK IN connector.  
The time code generator of the VTR unit can be  
locked to an external generator.  
<Notes>  
OWhen the frame rate is set to 24 fps, this unit will  
perform the processing in the non-drop frame mode  
in order to maintain the continuity of the frames  
even when the time code has been set to the drop  
frame mode.  
When locking to an external signal  
Reference  
time code  
GENLOCK IN  
TC IN  
Furthermore, when the frame frequency has been  
set to 60.00 Hz as well, the unit performs the  
processing in the non-drop frame mode.  
If an external time code generator is used, set it to  
the non-drop frame mode.  
Reference  
video signal  
OUse the same frame frequency setting for the  
reference time code and reference videos signal as  
the unit’s setting.  
The built-in time code generator is now locked to the  
reference time code.  
About 10 seconds after locking, the external lock  
status will be retained even if the connection of the  
externally supplied reference time code is  
disconnected. However, the servo lock will be subject  
to disturbances if it is connected or disconnected  
during recording (REC).  
When the frame rate is used at 24 fps, the image  
may be disturbed if the frame frequencies differ.  
67  
Tape management information  
This unit automatically stores as the tape management information both the frame rate information which  
indicates the shooting speed and the active frame information which indicates the first frame where the frame  
image was switched in the user bits of the sub-code track area (this used to be the LTC area). This information  
is output from the TC OUT connector, HD SDI MON connector and HD SDI EE connector. Further, the active  
frame information is stored in the least significant digit of the user bits while the frame rate information is stored  
in its lower third and fourth digits.  
Example of display  
VITC user bits  
LTC user bits  
OWhen the internal color bar signals are being  
User bits setting  
recorded  
Tape management information  
LTC user bits verification information  
User bits setting  
0 1 : 1 2 : 0 1 : x x  
Frame frequency  
5: 59.94 Hz  
6: 60.00 Hz  
To verify the VITC user bits, set the DISPLAY  
switch to UB, and hold down the HOLD button.  
While the HOLD button is held down, the VITC user  
bits information appears on the counter display.  
Tape management information  
OActive frame information  
OREC START/STOP mark  
0 1 : 1 2 : 0 1 : 5 0  
<Reference>  
The table below shows the correlation between the  
active frame rate and time code in the 24P, 25P, 30P  
and 50P modes.  
OWhen the camera’s video signals are being  
recorded  
Recorded frame number count  
This indicates the number of frames  
recorded.  
Frame rate: 24 fps (2:3)  
Active frame  
When the frame rate has been set to  
24 fps and recording has been  
performed for 10 seconds, “0240”  
will be displayed as the count.  
When recording is started, the count  
is reset to “0000,” and the number of  
recorded frames per cut is counted  
up to “9999.”  
Time code frame  
•••  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
digit  
•••  
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
D
D
D
A
A
B
B
C
D
D
D
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
D
D
D
Image  
Active frame  
information  
•••  
10  
10  
01  
01  
00  
10  
10  
01  
23  
00  
24  
10  
25  
10  
26  
01  
27  
01  
28  
00  
29  
Frame rate: 25 fps (2:3:2:3:2)  
Frame rate information  
24 fps  
(23.98 fps)  
Time code frame  
digit  
•••  
•••  
•••  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
D
D
D
E
E
A
A
E
E
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
D
D
D
E
E
Image  
Frame frequency  
5: 59.94 Hz  
6: 60.00 Hz  
Active frame  
information  
10  
10  
01  
01  
00  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
01  
01  
00  
10  
Frame rate: 30 fps (2:2)  
Tape management information  
OActive frame information  
OREC START/STOP mark  
Time code frame  
•••  
00  
01  
02  
digit  
0 2 : 4 0 : 2 4 : 5 0  
•••  
A
A
B
B
C
C
Image  
Active frame  
information  
•••  
10  
10  
10  
Frame rate: 50 fps (2:1:1:1:1)  
Time code frame  
digit  
•••  
•••  
•••  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
A
A
B
C
D
E
A
A
B
C
D
E
A
A
D
E
A
A
B
C
D
E
A
A
B
C
D
E
Image  
Active frame  
information  
10  
11  
11  
10  
11  
11  
10  
11  
10  
11  
11  
10  
11  
11  
68  
How to use the user data  
The contents of the setting menus can be saved in the  
user area of the camera’s memory, and they can be  
loaded from this area. Use of this data speeds up the  
process of reproducing suitable setup statuses.  
Loading the user data  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “CAM CARD READ/WRITE”  
screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3.  
1
User data operation  
Menus are used to save the setting menu contents in  
the user area of the camera’s memory and load them  
from this area.  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
n
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
READUSERDATA  
Saving the user data  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “INITIALIZE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
1
<INITIALIZE>  
n
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the READ USER DATA item.  
2
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
READUSERDATA  
:1  
:1  
n
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the WRITE USER DATA item.  
2
3
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
3
4
WRITE?  
YES  
READ?  
YES  
NO  
n
NO  
n
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data settings are saved in the user area of the  
camera’s memory.  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data settings saved in the user area of the  
camera’s memory are loaded, and the settings are  
completed.  
After the data has been saved, press the MENU  
button twice.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
Press the MENU button twice.  
5
6
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
When the frame frequency setting has been  
changed, it is necessary to restart the unit by  
turning the POWER switch to OFF and then to ON  
again for the setting to be switched.  
69  
How to use the scene file  
The contents of the setting menus can be saved in the  
scene file area of the camera’s memory, and they can  
be loaded from this area.  
Four scene files are provided in the unit.  
Use of this data speeds up the process of reproducing  
suitable setup statuses.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the TITLE1, TITLE2, TITLE3 or TITLE4  
item that corresponds to the scene file whose title  
is to be provided.  
5
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
Scene file operation  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
Menus are used to save the setting menu contents in  
the scene file area of the camera’s memory and load  
them from this area.  
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
n
Saving the scene file  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “INITIALIZE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
1
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) moves to the title input area, and the input  
mode is established.  
6
7
<INITIALIZE>  
n
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
WRITE  
RESET  
<INITIALIZE>  
:1  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
m
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SCENE SEL item.  
2
3
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed  
is switched in the following sequence:  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the scene  
file number starts flashing. Turn the JOG dial  
button to select the scene file in which data is to be  
saved.  
Space: )  
7
letters: A—Z  
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
n
WRITE  
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –  
RESET  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
8
9
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the next position (right), and repeat  
steps 7 and 8 to set the characters (maximum of  
8).  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the scene file.  
4
70  
How to use the scene file (continued)  
When the title has been input, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the arrow (cursor) to the “:”  
position.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the  
following message appears.  
10  
13  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
<INITIALIZE>  
SELECT  
WRITE  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
:1  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
:1  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE  
:
m
22222222  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
WRITE?  
YES  
NO  
n
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data settings and title are saved in the  
scene file area of the camera’s memory.  
<Note>  
The setting is not effective if the unit is  
transferred to a different menu or if the menu is  
exited without executing “WRITE.”  
14  
15  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) returns to the TITLE1, TITLE2, TITLE3  
or TITLE4 item.  
11  
12  
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
22222222  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
n
After the data has been saved, press the MENU  
button twice.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the WRITE item.  
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
n
22222222  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
71  
How to use the scene file (continued)  
Loading the scene file  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
6
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
1
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
and display the “INITIALIZE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
:1  
<INITIALIZE>  
n
READUSERDATA  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
TITLE  
:
WRITE  
READ?  
YES  
RESET  
NO  
n
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data settings saved in the scene file area of  
the camera’s memory are loaded, and the settings  
are completed.  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SCENE SEL item.  
2
3
Press the MENU button twice.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the scene  
file number starts flashing. Turn the JOG dial  
button to select the scene file whose data is to be  
loaded.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
n
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the scene file.  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the READ item.  
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:2  
n
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
72  
How to use the scene file (continued)  
Resetting the scene file  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
6
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “INITIALIZE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
1
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
:1  
<INITIALIZE>  
n
READUSERDATA  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
TITLE  
:
:1  
RESET?  
YES  
WRITE  
RESET  
NO  
n
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data saved in the scene file area of the  
camera’s memory is reset and restored to the  
factory shipment status.  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SCENE SEL item.  
2
3
Press the MENU button twice.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the scene  
file number starts flashing. Turn the JOG dial  
button to select the scene file whose data is to be  
reset.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
n
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the scene file.  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the RESET item.  
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:2  
WRITE  
RESET  
n
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
73  
SD memory card operations  
Setting Data Using an SD memory card  
An SD memory card (optional accessory) can be used  
as a setup card that stores up to eight files of settings  
menu specifications.  
How to eject the SD memory card  
Open the cover by raising its bottom edge, and eject  
the SD memory card.  
<Note>  
Use of this data speeds up the process of reproducing  
suitable setup statuses.  
Take care not to touch the connector on the edge of  
the SD memory card directly.  
OThe SD memory cards used with this unit do not  
comply with the SD standards. Do not use the SD  
memory cards formatted with other camera-  
recorders.  
SD memory cards that have been formatted on  
personal computers (NTFS, FAT32) cannot be  
used with this unit. They also may not be formatted  
on this unit.  
SD memory cards with the following capacity (8 MB  
- 512 MB) can be used for the unit:  
8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB,  
256 MB, 512 MB  
How to insert the SD memory card  
With the surface bearing the logo facing you, insert  
the SD memory card into the SD memory card slot,  
and close the cover.  
<Note>  
Bear in mind the following points when using  
and saving the SD memory cards.  
OAvoid high temperatures and high humidity levels.  
Check that the surface bearing the logo is facing you  
and the lettering is not upside down before inserting  
the card.  
OKeep the cards away from water.  
When inserting the card, check the direction in which  
the card is pointing, and if it does not slide neatly into  
place, it means that the card may be pointing in the  
wrong direction or that it may be upside down. Do not  
force the card into place but check which is the front  
and back and which is the top and bottom, and try  
inserting the card again.  
OAvoid exposing the cards to electrical charges.  
Keep the SD memory card inside the unit with the  
cover closed.  
74  
SD memory card operations (continued)  
The operations for saving setting data on the SD  
To proceed with the formatting of the SD memory  
card, turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
When the formatting of the card is completed, the  
following message appears.  
4
memory card and loading the saved data from the  
card are performed on the CAM CARD READ/WRITE  
screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3.  
Formatting the SD memory card  
<Note>  
When the card is formatted, the settings statuses  
applying at the time are also saved in the memory.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “CAM CARD READ/WRITE”  
screen.  
1
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
SELECT  
:1  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
n
:1  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
TITLE  
:
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
CONFIGOK  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
If one of the following messages appears when the JOG dial  
button is pressed, the card will not be formatted.  
Error message  
CONFIG NG  
NO CARD  
(SD memory card has not been  
inserted)  
Remedial action  
Insert the card.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the CARD CONFIG item.  
2
3
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
CONFIG NG  
ERROR  
(the card cannot be formatted)  
The card may be defective.  
Replace it.  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
n
READUSERDATA  
TITLE:  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
5
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears on the screen.  
<Note>  
Data titles cannot be recognized when the SD  
memory card was inserted while the CAM CARD  
READ/WRITE screen was open. Move the arrow  
(cursor) to the TITLE READ item, and press the  
JOG dial button.  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE  
:
The data title is recognized, and the title is  
displayed.  
CONFIG?  
YES  
NO  
n
75  
SD memory card operations (continued)  
Saving the data settings on the  
card  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “CAM CARD READ/WRITE”  
screen.  
Give a title to the selected file.  
1
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “TITLE : ” item.  
4
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
n
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
READ  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
READUSERDATA  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
TITLE:  
n
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Select the file No.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) moves to the title input area, and the input  
mode is established.  
5
6
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SELECT item which comes avove  
WRITE, and press the JOG dial button.  
2
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
n
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
READUSERDATA  
READUSERDATA  
m
TITLE:  
1:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
TITLE:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed  
Turn the JOG dial button to select a number from 1  
to 8, and press the JOG dial button.  
3
is switched in the following sequence:  
Space: )  
7
letters: A—Z  
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the next position (right), and repeat  
steps 6 and 7 to set the characters (maximum of  
8).  
76  
SD memory card operations (continued)  
Saving the data settings to the selected file.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the  
following message appears.  
12  
When the title has been input, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the arrow (cursor) to the “:”  
position.  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
9
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
READUSERDATA  
:1  
:1  
TITLE  
:
WRITE?  
YES  
NO  
n
22222222  
:
TITLE  
m
22222222  
TITLE:  
1:  
5:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
When the data saving is completed, the  
following message appears.  
13  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) returns to the TITLE: item.  
10  
11  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
:1  
:1  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
TITLE  
:
READUSERDATA  
WRITEOK  
YES  
22222222  
TITLE:  
n
NO  
n
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
22222222  
:
TITLE  
To save the VTR unit’s data, open the VTR CARD  
READ/WRITE screen, and perform steps 11 to 13.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the WRITE item.  
If one of the following messages appears when the JOG dial  
button is pressed, the data cannot be saved.  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
Error message  
WRITE NG  
NO CARD  
(SD memory card has not been  
inserted)  
Remedial action  
Insert the card.  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
n
READUSERDATA  
22222222  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
WRITE NG  
FORMAT ERROR  
(formatting error)  
The card was formatted by a  
device other than the unit.  
Replace the card.  
WRITE NG  
ERROR  
The card may be defective.  
Replace it.  
(the data cannot be saved)  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
14  
77  
SD memory card operations (continued)  
Load the data of the selected file.  
Loading the data saved on the  
card  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the READ item.  
4
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “CAM CARD READ/WRITE”  
screen.  
1
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
n
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
n
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
READUSERDATA  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
5
6
If the data is given a title when it is saved, the title  
will also be displayed.  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
<Note>  
:1  
:1  
“F_” appears in front of a title which was set in  
the film mode; “V_” appears in front of a title  
which was set in the video mode. When the  
data has been loaded, the unit is set to the  
operation mode of the loaded data.  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE  
:
READ?  
YES  
NO  
n
Select the file No.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
When the data loading is completed, the following  
message appears.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SELECT item which comes avove  
READ, and press the JOG dial button.  
2
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
WRITE  
SELECT  
:1  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
n
:1  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
TITLE  
:
READUSERDATA  
READOK  
YES  
NO  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
n
22222222  
:
TITLE  
To load the VTR unit’s data, open the VTR CARD  
READ/WRITE screen, and perform steps 4 to 6.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select any number  
from 1 to 8, and press the JOG dial button.  
3
78  
SD memory card operations (continued)  
If one of the following messages appears when the JOG dial  
button is pressed, the data cannot be loaded.  
Error message  
READ NG  
Remedial action  
Insert the card.  
NO CARD  
(SD memory card has not been  
inserted)  
READ NG  
FORMAT ERROR  
(formatting error)  
The card was formatted by a  
device other than the unit.  
Replace the card.  
READ NG  
NO FILE  
Save the file data.  
(file not found)  
READ NG  
ERROR  
Data saved by devices other than  
unit cannot be loaded.  
(the data cannot be loaded)  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
7
79  
Cassette tapes  
Loading a cassette tape  
Check that there are no cables around the cassette  
holder or top panel, and set the POWER switch to  
ON.  
<Note>  
Checking for tape slack  
1
Gently push in the reel using your finger and turn the  
reel in the direction of the arrow. If the reel fails to  
turn, it means there is no tape slack.  
When condensation has formed inside the unit, the  
HUMID display lights. Wait until this display is  
cleared before proceeding with the intended  
operation.  
HUMID display  
Ejecting the cassette tape  
While the power is still on, press the EJECT button to  
open the cassette holder, and take out the cassette  
tape. If another cassette is not going to be loaded  
immediately after this tape is ejected, close the  
cassette holder.  
POWER: ON  
Ejecting the cassette when the battery  
has no charge  
First, set the POWER switch to OFF to turn off the  
unit’s power.  
Press the EJECT button.  
The cassette holder opens.  
2
EJECT button  
Then turn the power back on, and immediately hold  
down the EJECT button.  
The cassette can be removed when there is still some  
power left in the battery. However, do not repeat this  
operation.  
To prevent accidental erasure  
Set the cassette’s tab to SAVE to prevent the  
recordings on the tape from being erased accidentally.  
Cassette holder  
REC  
SAVE  
Insert the cassette tape and press the part marked  
with the arrow to close the cassette holder  
securely.  
3
<Note>  
Check that there is no slack in the tape of the  
cassette.  
80  
Recording  
This section describes the basic steps for shooting  
and recording.  
Before actually departing to shoot scenes, carry out  
inspections to ensure that the system is functioning  
properly.  
OFor details on how to perform these inspections,  
refer to “Inspections prior to shooting” (pages 132  
to 135).  
From adjusting the white balance and  
black balance to stopping the recording  
Turn on the power, and after inserting the cassette,  
set the switches as shown in the figure below.  
OUTPUT:  
CAM/AUTO KNEE ON  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH 1/CH 2:  
AUTO  
From providing the power supply to  
loading the cassette  
Install a fully charged battery pack.  
1
Set the POWER switch to ON. Now check that the  
2
HUMID display is not showing and that at least 5  
segments of the remaining battery charge display  
are lighted.  
OIf the HUMID display is showing, wait until it  
goes off.  
OIf at least 5 segments of the remaining battery  
charge display are not lighted, replace the  
battery with a fully charged one.  
TCG:  
F-RUN or  
R-RUN  
GAIN:  
Aperture: Automatic  
Check that there are no cables around the cassette  
holder or top panel, and then press the EJECT  
button to open the cassette holder.  
3
Normally set to 0 dB; change  
to a more suitable value if the  
picture is too dark.  
After checking the following, insert the cassette  
4
tape, and close the cassette holder.  
OPosition of the accidental erasure prevent tab  
OTape slack  
3
4
2
2
1
81  
Recording (continued)  
Shooting  
1-1 Select the filter to match the lighting conditions,  
Tape function buttons  
During recording, the tape function buttons (EJECT,  
REW, FF, PLAY/PAUSE and STOP) will not work.  
and set the WHITE BAL switch to “A” or “B” if  
the white balance has been stored in the  
memory ahead of time.  
If the white balance and/or black balance  
have not been stored in the memory and  
there is no time to adjust the white balance:  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST. The  
white balance for the filter is achieved in  
accordance with the setting position of the  
FILTER control (outer).  
1-2 When adjusting the white balance on the  
spot  
Select the filter to match the lighting conditions,  
set the WHITE BAL switch to “A” or “B,” and  
adjust the white balance as follows:  
(1) Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the  
AWB position and adjust the white balance.  
(2) Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the  
ABB position and adjust the black balance.  
(3) Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the  
AWB position and adjust the white balance  
again.  
1-1, 1-2  
3
1-2  
4, 5  
2
For details on how to adjust the white balance,  
refer to “Adjusting the white balance and black  
balance” (pages 53 to 56).  
Point the camera at the subject, and adjust the  
focus and zoom.  
2
When the electronic shutter is to be used, set the  
3
shutter speed and operating mode.  
OFor details, refer to “Setting the electronic  
shutter” (pages 57 to 59).  
Press the VTR START button or lens VTR button  
to start recording.  
During recording, the REC lamp inside the  
viewfinder lights.  
4
To stop the recording, press the VTR START  
button again.  
The REC lamp inside the viewfinder goes off.  
5
82  
Recording (continued)  
Scene-to-scene continuity  
If the unit is in the rec-pause mode, it is possible to  
ensure scene-to-scene continuity with an accuracy of  
0 up to 1 frame just by pressing the VTR START  
button or lens VTR button.  
If the unit is in a mode other than rec-pause, the point  
at which the scene-to-scene continuity is to be  
maintained must be located before recording is  
started.  
Ensuring scene-to-scene continuity at  
other times  
Proceed as follows either after the tape has been  
allowed to run or after the cassette has been ejected  
or when ensuring continuity on a tape which has been  
recorded only in part.  
While monitoring the viewfinder screen, press the  
PLAY/PAUSE button to play back the tape.  
1
During rec-pause  
The scene-to-scene continuity timing is located  
automatically. However, the time taken until the start  
of recording differs depending on the setting of the  
VTR SAVE/STBY switch.  
At the place on the tape where continuity is to be  
maintained, press the PLAY/PAUSE (or STOP)  
button again to stop the tape.  
2
OWhen the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is set to SAVE,  
recording commences about two seconds after the  
VTR START button is pressed.  
OWhen the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is set to STBY,  
recording commences as soon as the VTR START  
button is pressed.  
Press the lens RET button.  
3
No playback images are shown, but two or so  
seconds later preparations are made for shooting  
with scene-to-scene continuity.  
To check whether the tape has been cued up to  
the place where shooting with scene-to-scene  
continuity is to start, press the RET button again.  
Ensuring scene-to-scene continuity after  
the power was turned off while the unit  
was in the rec-pause mode  
Press the VTR START button or lens VTR button  
to start the recording.  
4
Switch the power back on.  
1
1,2  
3
Press the VTR START button or lens VTR button  
to start the recording.  
2
4
2
1
The functions of a VTR START/STOP button can be  
assigned to the USER1 or USER2 button on the  
unit’s side panel on the CAM SW MODE screen of  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2, and this button can  
then be used to perform the start and stop  
operations.  
83  
Playback  
(checking what has been recorded)  
When the PLAY/PAUSE button is pressed, the  
playback pictures can be monitored on the viewfinder  
screen.  
These playback pictures can be monitored in two  
other ways.  
Rec review  
Color playback  
When recording is temporarily stopped and the lens  
RET button is pressed, the last two seconds of the  
tape are automatically rewound, and the playback  
pictures on this part of the tape appear on the  
viewfinder screen. This makes it possible to check  
whether recording was performed properly.  
After the two seconds of the tape have been played  
back, the unit is again set to the recording start  
standby mode.  
When an HD color monitor is connected to the unit’s  
HD SDI MON connector, color playback pictures can  
be monitored.  
The playback signals will be output to the viewfinder  
even during rewinding (REW) or fast forwarding (FF).  
Selecting the audio output of the playback signal and  
adjusting the volume are accomplished using the  
MONITOR switch control (page 12).  
If the RET button is held down, a maximum of 10  
seconds of the tape is rewound and played back.  
<Note>  
The rec review function cannot be used unless  
recording lasts for one or more seconds.  
The functions of the RET button on the lens can be  
assigned to the USER1 or USER2 button on the  
unit’s side panel on the CAM SW MODE screen of  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2, and this button can  
then be used to perform the return operations.  
Lens RET button functions  
Depending on the internal VTR status, the RET button  
functions which appear on the viewfinder screen  
change as follows.  
The functions of the RET button on the lens can be  
assigned to the USER1 or USER2 button on the  
unit’s side panel on the CAM SW MODE screen of  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2, and this button can  
then be used to perform the return operations.  
Internal VTR  
What appears on the viewfinder screen  
status  
During recording  
Pictures which are shot by the camera  
(RET button does not work)  
During rec-  
pause  
What has just been recorded (rec review of 2  
seconds of the tape recording) can be checked.  
During playback  
Playback pictures of internal VTR  
(RET button does not work)  
During play-  
pause  
Pictures which are shot by the camera at that  
time; the same also applies during cue-up  
operations for ensuring frame-to-frame continuity.  
84  
Other VTR functions  
NEWS REC function  
INTERVAL REC (intermittent recording)  
function  
The NEWS REC function is set using NEWS REC  
MODE on the VTR MENU “FUNCTION” screen.  
This function makes simple interval shooting  
(intermittent recording) possible. It proves to be  
particularly effective when shooting programs with a  
nature theme or art programs.  
The INTERVAL REC function is set on the VTR  
MENU “FUNCTION” screen.  
By  
controlling  
the  
VTR  
START  
button  
acknowledgment time during recording (by up to 2  
seconds), the time taken for the unit to transfer from  
the recording mode to the rec-pause mode can be  
delayed.  
In other words, by controlling the VTR START button  
operation acknowledgment time, the unit can  
continuously record without the user having to  
interrupt the recording: this safeguards against the  
failure to record those precious moments—a failure  
that occurs when recording is resumed immediately  
after it was shut down temporarily.  
OINTERVAL REC MODE  
This sets the INTERVAL REC function to ON, ONE  
SHOT or OFF.  
OINTERVAL REC TIME  
This sets the recording time (1 cut) for interval  
shooting.  
OINTERVAL PAUSE TIME  
This sets the rec-pause time for interval shooting.  
RETAKE function  
Once the above items are set, the unit is set to the  
INTERVAL REC mode, and “i” starts to flash inside  
the viewfinder.  
When the VTR START button is now pressed, interval  
shooting is started, and “iREC” lights in place of “i.”  
Also, the time unit (h/min/s/frm) display on the counter  
display area starts to flash.  
When the unit is set to rec-pause mode upon  
completion of the first interval shooting, “iREC” goes  
from lighted to flashing inside the viewfinder.  
The time unit display on the counter display area  
remains flashing.  
The RETAKE function is activated by selecting ON for  
RETAKE MODE on the VTR MENU “FUNCTION”  
screen.  
If the lens RET button is pressed while holding down  
the MODE CHECK button when the unit is in the rec-  
pause mode upon completion of a recording or  
subsequently in the STOP mode, the tape will be  
rewound to a point near the start point (a position  
about 10 frames ahead of the recording start point) of  
the final picture which was last recorded, and the unit  
will be set to the rec-pause mode.  
If there is enough leeway in the shooting time and a  
particular cut is clearly judged to be no good,  
recording can be started from that point so that the  
no-good cut will be deleted.  
To forcibly stop recording at any point in time during  
interval recording, press the STOP button repeatedly.  
By cutting down on the time taken for copying onto the  
work tape, for instance, this function is very effective  
in achieving economical operation.  
iREC  
RET button  
MODE CHECK button  
h
min  
s
frm  
85  
Menu operations  
The setting menu operations are performed using the  
MENU button and JOG dial button. The menu  
configuration is divided into the camera unit’s setting  
menus and VTR unit’s setting menus.  
It is possible to select the engineer menu which  
enables all the setting menu items to be set or,  
alternatively, the user menu which consists of  
individually tailored menus so that only those menus  
which will be used most frequently can be set.  
User menu  
The user menu was set when the unit was shipped.  
However, the user can change the configuration of the  
menus by selecting only those menus which will be  
used most frequently so that they will be tailored to  
the user’s individual needs.  
Set the user menu on the USER MENU SELECT 1, 2,  
and 3 screen of the engineer menu. The data settings  
are saved in the non-volatile memory for long-term  
storage. The menu settings performed in the film  
mode and video mode are saved separately.  
MENU button  
JOG dial button  
Engineer menu  
All the setting menu items can be set on this menu.  
The data settings are saved in the non-volatile  
memory for long-term storage.  
Display method  
OHold down the MENU button for at least 3 seconds.  
OWhen the MENU button is pressed again, the VTR  
unit’s MAIN MENU screen is displayed.  
OWhen the MENU button is pressed once more, the  
menu screen display is cleared.  
Display method  
OWhen the MENU button is pressed, the camera  
unit’s USER menu screen is displayed.  
OWhen the MENU button is pressed again, the VTR  
unit’s USER menu screen is displayed.  
OWhen the MENU button is pressed once more, the  
menu screen display is cleared.  
<Note>  
The engineer menu is displayed at all times when the  
AJ-EC3 extension control unit (optional accessory) is  
connected to the unit for operating the unit by remote  
control.  
When the power is switched on  
Status display  
1A B  
0dB  
CZ73  
Film mode and video mode  
The unit can be set to the film mode or video mode on  
the OPTION screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
When VIDEO MENU is selected as the CAM MENU  
SEL setting on the OPTION screen, the FILM USER  
MENU and FILM MAIN MENU displays change to the  
CAM USER MENU and CAM MAIN MENU.  
Press the MENU  
button.  
¢¢¢¢ FILMUSERMENU¢¢¢¢  
Camera unit’s user  
menu  
The menu settings performed in the film mode and  
video mode are saved separately.  
Press the MENU  
button.  
¢¢¢¢ VTRUSERMENU¢¢¢¢  
VTR unit’s user  
menu  
Press the MENU button.  
86  
Menu operations (continued)  
Basic setting menu operations  
Displaying menus  
User menu:  
Engineer menu  
Press the MENU button.  
The camera unit’s USER menu screen is  
displayed.  
Hold down the MENU button for at least 3  
seconds.  
1
1
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the next  
MAIN menu screen (of the camera unit) is  
displayed.  
2
When the MENU button is pressed again, the VTR  
unit’s USER menu screen is displayed.  
2
When the MENU button is pressed, the VTR unit’s  
MAIN MENU screen is displayed.  
3
Press the MENU  
button.  
Hold down the MENU button  
for at least 3 seconds.  
}
}
FILM (CAM)  
USER MENU  
Press the  
MENU button.  
FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 1  
Press the  
MENU button.  
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
VTR USER MENU  
VTR MAIN MENU  
}
}
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
}
FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2  
Press the  
MENU button.  
}
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
}
FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 3  
Press the  
MENU button.  
}
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
}
FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 4  
Press the  
MENU button.  
}
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
87  
Menu operations (continued)  
Displaying sub-menus and deciding  
on settings  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
desired item to be set, and press the JOG dial  
button.  
3
The digit whose value is to be set now flashes.  
Operations common to the user menu and  
engineer menu  
Example:  
<ROP>  
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
Turn the JOG dial button while the USER menu  
screen or MAIN menu screen is displayed.  
I
1
MASTERPED  
MASTERDTL  
MASTERGAMMA  
RGAIN  
:+000  
:+00  
n
:0.45  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
The cursor ( ) moves to the SUB menu item.  
n
GGAIN  
BGAIN  
RPEDESTAL  
GPEDESTAL  
BPEDESTAL  
Example:  
2222  
2222  
FILMMAINMENU1  
Turn the JOG  
dial button.  
n
I
ROP  
MATRIX  
COLORCORRECTION1  
COLORCORRECTION2  
LOWSETTING  
MIDSETTING  
HIGHSETTING  
ADITIONALDTL1  
ADITIONALDTL2  
SKINTONEDTL  
KNEE/LEVEL  
Turn the JOG dial button to change the setting.  
4
5
When the desired setting is reached, press the  
JOG dial button.  
The setting is now entered.  
GAMMA  
CAMERASETTING  
Move the cursor ( ) to the desired SUB menu  
2
n
When other items are to be set, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the cursor, and change and enter  
the settings by repeating steps 3 to 5.  
6
7
item, and press the JOG dial button.  
The SUB menu is now displayed.  
(The cursor appears in the title part of the SUB  
menu.)  
To move to another SUB menu, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the cursor to the title part of the  
SUB menu, and press the JOG dial button.  
The USER menu screen or MAIN menu screen is  
now displayed so proceed with operation by  
following the same steps.  
Example:  
2222  
2222  
FILMMAINMENU1  
n
n
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
I
ROP  
MATRIX  
COLORCORRECTION1  
COLORCORRECTION2  
LOWSETTING  
MIDSETTING  
HIGHSETTING  
ADITIONALDTL1  
ADITIONALDTL2  
SKINTONEDTL  
KNEE/LEVEL  
Example:  
<ROP>  
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
n
I
MASTERPED  
MASTERDTL  
MASTERGAMMA  
RGAIN  
:+008  
:+00  
GAMMA  
CAMERASETTING  
:0.45  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
GGAIN  
BGAIN  
RPEDESTAL  
GPEDESTAL  
BPEDESTAL  
<ROP>  
n
MASTERPED  
MASTERDTL  
MASTERGAMMA  
RGAIN  
GGAIN  
BGAIN  
RPEDESTAL  
GPEDESTAL  
BPEDESTAL  
:+000  
:+00  
:0.45  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
Upon completion of the settings, press the MENU  
button. The settings are now recorded, the setting  
menu mode is exited, and the normal operation  
mode is restored.  
8
<Note>  
To exit the camera unit’s menu, press the MENU  
button twice. When the MENU button is pressed  
once, operation is transferred to the VTR unit’s  
menu.  
88  
Setting menu configuration  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1  
ROP  
MASTER PED  
MASTER DTL  
MASTER GAMMA  
R GAIN  
MATRIX  
} MATRIX TABLE  
MATRIX R-G  
MATRIX R-B  
MATRIX G-R  
MATRIX G-B  
MATRIX B-R  
MATRIX B-G  
G GAIN  
B GAIN  
R PEDESTAL  
G PEDESTAL  
B PEDESTAL  
COLOR CORRECTION 1  
COLOR CORRECTION 2  
R
(SAT)/(PHASE)  
Mg (SAT)/(PHASE)  
(SAT)/(PHASE)  
Cy (SAT)/(PHASE)  
R-Mg (SAT)/(PHASE)  
Mg-B (SAT)/(PHASE)  
B-Cy (SAT)/(PHASE)  
Cy-G (SAT)/(PHASE)  
G-Yl (SAT)/(PHASE)  
Yl-R (SAT)/(PHASE)  
B
G
(SAT)/(PHASE)  
Yl (SAT)/(PHASE)  
LOW SETTING  
MID SETTING  
} MASTER GAIN  
H. DTL LEVEL  
} MASTER GAIN  
H. DTL LEVEL  
V. DTL LEVEL  
DTL CORING  
H. DTL FREQ  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
MASTER GAMMA  
BLACK STRETCH  
} MATRIX TABLE  
} COLOR CORRECT  
V. DTL LEVEL  
DTL CORING  
H. DTL FREQ  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
MASTER GAMMA  
BLACK STRETCH  
} MATRIX TABLE  
} COLOR CORRECT  
} MASTER GAIN  
H. DTL LEVEL  
HIGH SETTING  
KNEE APERTURE  
SLIM DTL  
V. DTL LEVEL  
} ADDITIONAL DTL1  
DTL CORING  
H. DTL FREQ  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
MASTER GAMMA  
BLACK STRETCH  
} MATRIX TABLE  
} COLOR CORRECT  
ADDITIONAL DTL2  
KNEE APE LVL  
DTL GAIN (+)  
DTL GAIN (–)  
DTL CLIP  
DTL SOURCE  
V DTL FREQ.  
SKIN TONE DTL  
KNEE/LEVEL  
} SKIN TONE DTL  
} SKIN TONE ZEBRA  
SKIN DTL CORING  
Y MAX  
MASTER PED  
} MANUAL KNEE  
KNEE POINT  
Y MIN  
I CENTER  
KNEE SLOPE  
I WIDTH  
} WHITE CLIP  
Q WIDTH  
WHITE CLIP LVL  
A. KNEE POINT  
A. KNEE LVL  
Q PHASE  
A. KNEE RESPONSE  
GAMMA  
MASTER GAMMA (FILM MENU)  
R GAMMA  
B GAMMA  
} CAMERA SETTING  
DETAIL  
HIGH COLOR  
GAMMA  
CINE GAMMA SEL (FILM MENU)  
BLACK STR. LVL (FILM MENU)  
DYNAMIC LVL (FILM MENU)  
TEST SAW  
FLARE  
H-F COMPE  
LIGHTING (FILM MENU)  
D5600K (CAM MENU)  
<Note>  
Items indicated with } are items whose settings can only be switched ON and OFF.  
89  
Setting menu configuration (continued)  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3  
VF DIAPLSY  
DISP CONDITION  
DISP MODE  
CAM CARD READ/WRITE  
SELECT  
READ  
VF OUT  
SELECT  
WRITE  
VF DTL  
ZEBRA1 DETECT  
ZEBRA2 DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
LOW LIGHT LVL  
SYNCHRO SCAN DISP.  
ECU MENU DISP.  
CARD CONFIG  
TITLE READ  
READ USER DATA  
TITLE 1:  
TITLE 2:  
TITLE 3:  
TITLE 4:  
VF MARKER  
SAFETY ZONE  
CENTER MARK  
FRAME SIG  
MARK  
TITLE 5:  
TITLE 6:  
TITLE 7:  
TITLE 8:  
LVL  
CAM CARD R/W SELECT  
ID READ/WRITE  
VF INDICATOR  
EXTENDER  
SHUTTER  
FILTER  
CAM MAIN MENU1 LEVEL R/W  
CAM MAIN MENU1 SW (}) R/W  
CAM MAIN MENU2 R/W  
CAM MAIN MENU3 R/W  
CAM MAIN MENU4 R/W  
WHITE  
GAIN  
IRIS  
CAMERA ID  
ZOOM LVL  
COLOR TEMP  
FRAME RATE  
VERSION ID (FILM MENU)  
LENS FILE  
FILE SELECT  
READ  
WRITE  
RESET ALL  
TITLE  
CAMERA ID  
ID 1: 2222222222  
ID 2: 2222222222  
ID 3: 2222222222  
LENS FILE (CARD R/W)  
GENLOCK/IRIS  
CARD FILE SELECT  
READ  
WRITE  
TITLE  
SHUTTER SPEED  
SYNCHRO SCAN 1  
SYNCHRO SCAN 2  
POSITION 1  
H PHASE COARSE  
H PHASE FINE  
A. IRIS LEVEL  
A. IRIS PEAK/AVE  
A. IRIS MODE  
S. IRIS LEVEL  
IRIS GAIN  
POSITION 2  
POSITION 3  
POSITION 4  
POSITION 5  
POSITION 6  
IRIS GAIN VALUE  
SHUTTER SELECT  
SYNCHRO SCAN 2  
POSITION 1 SEL  
POSITION 2 SEL  
POSITION 3 SEL  
POSITION 4 SEL  
POSITION 5 SEL  
POSITION 6 SEL  
LENS ADJ  
F2.8 ADJ  
F16 ADJ  
! LED  
GAIN (0dB)  
GAIN (–3dB)  
SHUTTER  
WHITE PRESET  
EXTENDER  
FILTER  
BLACK STR  
DAY LIGHT (FILM MENU)  
D5600K (CAM MENU)  
MATRIX  
COLOR CORRECTION  
FRAME RATE  
FILTER INH  
CAMERA SW MODE  
SHOCKLESS AWB  
COLOR BARS  
S. GAIN OFF  
USER1 SW  
USER2 SW  
S. BLK LVL  
ECU DATA SAVE  
AUTO KNEE SW  
S. GAIN VALUE  
SUPER GAIN  
FRAME MODE  
FRAME RATE RANGE  
FRAME RATE  
SCAN REVERSE  
USER SW FRAME RATE  
90  
Setting menu configuration (continued)  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT1  
ROP  
LOW SETTING  
MID SETTING  
HIGH SETTING  
ADDITIONAL DTL1  
ADDITIONAL DTL2  
SKIN TONE DTL  
KNEE/LEVEL  
GAMMA  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT2  
VF DISPLAY  
VF MARKER  
VF INDICATOR  
!LED  
CAMERA SW MODE  
SUPER GAIN  
FRAME MODE  
CAMERA SETTING  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT3  
BLACK SHADING  
CAM CARD READ/WRITE  
CAM CARD R/W SELECT  
LENS FILE  
LENS FILE (CARD R/W)  
GENLOCK/IRIS  
DETECTION  
CORRECT (DIG)  
WHITE SHADING  
FLARE  
DETECTION (V SAW)  
CORRECT  
R FLARE  
G FLARE  
B FLARE  
COLORIMETRY  
INITIALIZE  
MATRIX  
READ FACTORY DATA  
WRITE USER DATA  
SCENE SEL  
READ  
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE 1  
S/N  
S/N  
DETAIL  
TITLE 2  
TITLE 3  
H-F COMPE.  
GAMMA  
MATRIX  
FLARE  
TITLE 4  
CAMSOFT (IN)  
CAMSOFT (OUT)  
CAM TABLE  
PLD (CAM)  
DIAGNOSTIC  
M. PED  
MODULATION  
RESOLUTION  
SENSITIVITY  
MODULATION  
DETAIL  
PLD (SHD)  
PLD (FM)  
H-F COMPE.  
GAMMA  
MATRIX  
EVALUATION  
OPTION  
FLARE  
ENG SECURITY  
SHD, ABB SW CTRL  
AWB AREA  
M. PED  
RESOLUTION  
DETAIL  
AWB & ABB OFFSET  
CAM MENU SEL  
SYSTEM FREQ  
EVF SEL  
H-F COMPE.  
GAMMA  
MATRIX  
SUPER DTL  
FLARE  
M. PED  
SENSITIVITY  
KNEE  
W. CLIP  
M. PED  
How to interpret the menu lists  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
The following abbreviations indicate whether the menu changes  
are stored (written) in the corresponding data or loaded (read)  
from the data.  
MASTER PED  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
–200  
:
+000  
:
+018  
:
+200  
USER  
ENG  
MASTER PEDESTAL  
level setting.  
The changes cannot be stored or loaded when “/” is indicated.  
Described in this column  
are the operations which  
can be expected to  
result when the item’s  
settings are selected.  
S: The changes can be stored or loaded as scene file data.  
C: The changes can be stored or loaded using CARD  
READ/WRITE.  
U: The changes can be stored or loaded as user data.  
Refer to “INITIALIZE screen” (page 111).  
(Max.)  
S C U F E  
F: The changes can be stored or loaded as READ FACTORY  
DATA.  
Refer to “INITIALIZE screen” (page 111).  
E: The changes can be stored or loaded using ECU DATA SAVE.  
Refer to “Connecting the extension control unit” (page 41).  
USER: This appears on  
the user menu  
This column indicates the variable  
range in which the item can be set  
and the choice of the settings  
screen.  
ENG: This appears on  
the engineer menu  
screen.  
which can be selected for the item.  
91  
Setting menu configuration (continued)  
VTR MAIN MENU  
FUNCTION  
NEWS REC MODE  
HUMID OPE  
REC START  
BATTERY/TAPE  
BATTERY SELECT  
PAUSE TIMER  
RETAKE MODE  
EXT DC IN SELECT  
BATT NEAR END ALARM  
BATT NEAR END CANCEL  
BATT END ALARM  
INTERVAL REC MODE  
INTERVAL REC TIME  
INTERVAL PAUSE TIME  
ECU REC CHK SW  
CHARACTER ON SDI  
COMPRESSION MODE  
BATT REMAIN FULL  
TAPE NEAR END ALARM  
TAPE NEAR END TIME  
TAPE END ALARM  
TAPE REMAIN/$  
BATTERY SETTING  
MONITOR MARKER  
AJ-BP490  
AU-BP402  
HP-30A  
SAFETY ZONE  
CENTER MARK  
FRAME SIG  
MARK  
PRO14  
TRIM14  
TRIM13  
DIGITAL14  
DIGITAL13  
BP-H90  
BP-H100  
NP-L40  
NP-L40 D  
BP-L60/90  
NP-1B  
VTR VF INDICATOR  
MIC/AUDIO  
TC/UB  
TAPE (IND)  
BATTERY (IND)  
LEVEL METER (IND)  
AUDIO IN (IND)  
TC (IND)  
VTR WARNING (IND)  
COMPRESSION (IND)  
SAVE LED  
FUNCTION  
NEWS REC MODE  
HUMID OPE  
FRONT MIC POWER  
MIC LOWCUT CH1  
MIC LOWCUT CH2  
LIMITER  
TEST TONE  
CUE SELECT  
REC START  
PAUSE TIMER  
RETAKE MODE  
INTERVAL REC MODE  
INTERVAL REC TIME  
INTERVAL PAUSE TIME  
ECU REC CHK SW  
CHARACTER ON SDI  
COMPRESSION MODE  
EMBEDDED AUDIO (60 Hz)  
A/V SYNCHRO  
TC MODE  
UB MODE  
TCG SET HOLD  
FIRST REC TC  
P.OFF LCD DISPLAY  
TC OUT  
VITC UB MODE  
TC DISP SEL  
BATTERY/TAPE  
BATTERY SELECT  
EXT DC IN SELECT  
BATT NEAR END ALARM  
BATT NEAR END CANCEL  
BATT END ALARM  
BATT REMAIN FULL  
TAPE NEAR END ALARM  
TAPE NEAR END TIME  
TAPE END ALARM  
YEAR  
TIME/DATE  
MONTH  
DAY  
TAPE REMAIN/ $  
HOUR  
MINUTE  
$ TIME/DATE SET  
MONITOR MARKER  
VTR VF INDICATOR  
SAFETY ZONE  
CENTER MARK  
FRAME SIG  
MARK  
VTR USER MENU SELECT  
VTR CARD READ/WRITE  
READ  
WRITE  
READ USER DATA  
TAPE (IND)  
BATTERY (IND)  
LEVEL METER (IND)  
AUDIO IN (IND)  
TC (IND)  
READ FACTORY DATA  
WRITE VTR USER DATA  
VTR INITIALIZE  
DIAGNOSTIC  
VTR WARNING (IND)  
COMPRESSION (IND)  
SAVE LED  
OPERATION  
DRUM RUNNING  
THREADING  
VTR SYSCON  
SERVO  
MIC/AUDIO  
FRONT MIC POWER  
MIC LOWCUT CH1  
MIC LOWCUT CH2  
LIMITER  
TEST TONE  
CUE SELECT  
MECHACON  
FRONT  
SDI IF  
CODEC  
EMBEDDED AUDIO (60 Hz)  
A/V SYNCHRO  
AUDIO  
TC/UB  
TC MODE  
UB MODE  
TCG SET HOLD  
FIRST REC TC  
P.OFF LCD DISPLAY  
TC OUT  
VITC UB MODE  
TC DISP SEL  
92  
Setting menu screens  
FILM (CAM) MENUS  
The main menu consists of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU  
(1 to 4) of the camera and the VTR MAIN MENU of the  
VTR.  
These screens are index screens which are used to  
open the sub-menus.  
The setting menu is operated with the MENU button  
and JOG dial button.  
(Refer to pages 86 to 88 for the menu operations.)  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 screen  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
!LED  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the !LED screen.  
CAMERA SW  
MODE  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the CAMERA SW  
MODE screen.  
SUPER GAIN  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the SUPER GAIN  
screen.  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1 screen  
FRAME MODE  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the FRAME MODE  
screen.  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
ROP  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the ROP screen.  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3 screen  
MATRIX  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the MATRIX screen.  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
COLOR  
CORRECTION1  
Index for opening the COLOR  
CORRECTION 1 screen.  
CAM CARD  
READ/WRITE  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the CAM CARD  
READ/WRITE screen.  
COLOR  
CORRECTION2  
Index for opening the COLOR  
CORRECTION 2 screen.  
CAM CARD R/W USER  
Index for opening the CARD R/W  
SELECT screen.  
LOW SETTING  
MID SETTING  
HIGH SETTING  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the LOW SETTING  
screen.  
SELECT  
ENG  
GENLOCK/IRIS  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the GENLOCK/IRIS  
screen.  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the MID SETTING  
screen.  
LENS ADJ  
ENG  
Index for opening the LENS ADJ  
screen.  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the HIGH SETTING  
screen.  
ADDITIONAL  
DTL1  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the ADDITIONAL  
DTL 1 screen.  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4 screen  
ADDITIONAL  
DTL2  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the ADDITIONAL  
DTL 2 screen.  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
SKIN TONE DTL USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the SKIN TONE  
DTL screen.  
CAM USER  
MENU SELECT1  
ENG  
Index for opening the FILM (CAM)  
USER MENU SELECT 1 screen.  
KNEE/LEVEL  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the KNEE/LEVEL  
screen.  
CAM USER  
MENU SELECT2  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the FILM (CAM)  
USER MENU SELECT 2 screen.  
GAMMA  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the GAMMA screen.  
CAM USER  
MENU SELECT3  
Index for opening the FILM (CAM)  
USER MENU SELECT 3 screen.  
CAMERA  
SETTING  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the CAMERA  
SETTING screen.  
BLACK  
SHADING  
Index for opening the BLACK  
SHADING screen.  
WHITE  
SHADING  
Index for opening the WHITE  
SHADING screen.  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 screen  
FLARE  
Index for opening the FLARE screen.  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
COLORIMETRY ENG  
Index for opening the COLORIMETRY  
screen.  
VF DISPLAY  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the VF DISPLAY  
screen.  
INITIALIZE  
DIAGNOSTIC  
EVALUATION  
OPTION  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the INITIALIZE  
screen.  
VF MARKER  
VF INDICATOR  
CAMERA ID  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the VF MARKER  
screen.  
Index for opening the DIAGNOSTIC  
screen.  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the VF INDICATOR  
screen.  
Index for opening the EVALUATION  
screen.  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the CAMERA ID  
screen.  
Index for opening the OPTION screen.  
SHUTTER  
SPEED  
Index for opening the SHUTTER  
SPEED screen.  
SHUTTER  
SELECT  
Index for opening the SHUTTER  
SELECT screen.  
93  
Setting menu screens  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1  
ROP screen  
MATRIX screen  
The ROP (Remote Operation Panel) is set on this  
screen.  
The camera matrix is set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
A
B
ENG  
For selecting the color  
adjustment display.  
MATRIX TABLE  
S C U F E  
MATRIX R-G  
MASTER PED  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
–200  
:
+000  
:
+018  
:
USER  
ENG  
MASTER PEDESTAL  
level setting.  
–31  
:
+00  
:
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Color adjustment  
Color adjustment  
Color adjustment  
Color adjustment  
Color adjustment  
Color adjustment  
+31  
S C U F E  
+200  
(Max.)  
MATRIX R-B  
–31  
:
+00  
:
S C U F E  
MASTER DTL  
–31  
:
USER  
ENG  
H. DTL/V. DTL level  
setting.  
+00  
:
+31  
S C U F E  
MATRIX G-R  
–31  
:
+00  
:
+31  
S C U F E  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
:
USER  
ENG  
MASTER GAMMA setting.  
(0.01 step)  
0.45  
:
0.75  
Three different values can  
be stored for LOW, MID  
and HIGH in the memory.  
+31  
S C U F E  
MATRIX G-B  
–31  
:
+00  
:
S C U F E  
R GAIN  
–200  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting R channel  
gain.  
+000  
:
+31  
S C U F E  
MATRIX B-R  
–31  
:
+00  
:
+200  
(Max.)  
S C U F E  
G GAIN  
–200  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting G channel  
gain.  
+31  
S C U F E  
+000  
:
MATRIX B-G  
–31  
:
+200  
(Max.)  
+00  
:
S C U F  
B GAIN  
–200  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting B channel  
gain.  
+31  
S C U F E  
+000  
:
+200  
(Max.)  
<Notes>  
OThe white balance and black balance will not change even if the  
MATRIX is changed.  
OTwo tables, A and B, can be stored in the memory for the  
MATRIX TABLE item.  
S C U F E  
R PEDESTAL  
–100  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting R channel  
PEDESTAL level.  
O“00” applies for all the preset modes in MATRIX TABLE B.  
+000  
:
+100  
(Max.)  
S C U F E  
G PEDESTAL  
–100  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting G channel  
PEDESTAL level.  
+000  
:
+100  
(Max.)  
S C U F  
B PEDESTAL  
–100  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting B channel  
PEDESTAL level.  
+000  
:
+100  
(Max.)  
S C U F E  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
94  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1 (continued)  
COLOR CORRECTION 1 screen  
COLOR CORRECTION 2 screen  
The camera color saturation adjustments and hue The camera color saturation adjustments and hue  
adjustments are set on this screen.  
adjustments are set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
R (SAT)  
R (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
ENG  
Color saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: red  
R-Mg (SAT)  
R-Mg (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
ENG  
Color saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: between red  
and magenta  
+63  
+63  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
Mg (SAT)  
Mg (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Color saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: magenta  
Mg-B (SAT)  
Mg-B (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Color saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: between  
magenta and blue  
+63  
+63  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
B (SAT)  
B (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Color saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: blue  
B-Cy (SAT)  
B-Cy (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Color saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: between blue  
and cyan  
+63  
+63  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
Cy (SAT)  
Cy (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Color saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: cyan  
Cy-G (SAT)  
Cy-G (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Color saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: between cyan  
and green  
+63  
+63  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
G (SAT)  
G (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Color saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: green  
G-Yl (SAT)  
G-Yl (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Color saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: between  
green and yellow  
+63  
+63  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
Yl (SAT)  
Yl (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Color saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: yellow  
Yl-R (SAT)  
Yl-R (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Color saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: between  
yellow and red  
+63  
+63  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
95  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1 (continued)  
LOW SETTING screen  
MID SETTING screen  
The low level gain is set on this screen.  
The middle level gain is set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
–3dB  
:
0dB  
:
USER  
ENG  
–3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9  
dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB  
or 30 dB can be set.  
–3dB  
:
3dB  
:
USER  
ENG  
–3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9  
dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB  
or 30 dB can be set.  
MASTER  
GAIN  
(FILM MENU)  
MASTER  
GAIN  
(FILM MENU)  
30dB  
30dB  
S C U F E  
S C U F  
(CAM MENU)  
–6dB  
:
0dB  
:
–6dB, –3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6  
dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24  
dB or 30 dB can be set.  
(CAM MENU)  
–6dB  
:
6dB  
:
–6dB, –3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6  
dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24  
dB or 30 dB can be set.  
30dB  
30dB  
S C U F E  
S C U F  
H. DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting H.DTL (detail)  
level.  
H. DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting H.DTL (detail)  
level.  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
08  
:
12  
:
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
08  
:
12  
:
63  
63  
S C U F E  
S C U F  
V. DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting V.DTL (detail)  
level.  
V. DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting V.DTL (detail)  
level.  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
12  
:
16  
:
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
12  
:
16  
:
31  
31  
S C U F E  
S C U F  
DTL CORING  
00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting detail signal  
noise removal level.  
DTL CORING  
00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting detail signal  
noise removal level.  
02  
:
02  
:
15  
15  
S C U F E  
S C U F  
H. DTL FREQ  
00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For selecting H.DTL  
FREQUENCY.  
H. DTL FREQ  
00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For selecting H.DTL  
FREQUENCY.  
22  
:
22  
:
31  
31  
S C U F E  
S C U F  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
0
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting LEVEL  
DEPEND.  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
0
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting LEVEL  
DEPEND.  
2
:
5
The detail of only the dark  
areas is removed when  
the Y detail is boosted.  
The higher the figure set  
for this item, the broader  
the range of the detail  
which is removed.  
2
:
5
The detail of only the dark  
areas is removed when  
the Y detail is boosted.  
The higher the figure set  
for this item, the broader  
the range of the detail  
which is removed.  
S C U F E  
S C U F  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
:
USER  
ENG  
Master gamma setting.  
(0.01 step)  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
:
USER  
ENG  
Master gamma setting.  
(0.01 step)  
0.45  
:
0.45  
:
0.75  
0.75  
S C U F E  
S C U F  
BLACK  
STRETCH  
+3, +2, +1,  
OFF,  
USER  
ENG  
For correcting the black  
level gradation.  
BLACK  
STRETCH  
+3, +2, +1,  
OFF,  
USER  
ENG  
For correcting the black  
level gradation.  
–1, –2, –3  
–1, –2, –3  
S C U F E  
S C U F  
A
B
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the color  
correction matrix table.  
A
B
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the color  
correction matrix table.  
MATRIX  
TABLE  
MATRIX  
TABLE  
OFF  
OFF  
S C U F E  
S C U F  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the 12-axis  
independent color  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the 12-axis  
independent color  
COLOR  
CORRECT  
COLOR  
CORRECT  
correction to ON or OFF.  
correction to ON or OFF.  
S C U F E  
S C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
96  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1 (continued)  
HIGH SETTING screen  
ADDITIONAL DTL 1 screen  
The special detail features of the camera are set on  
this screen.  
The high level gain is set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
–3dB  
:
6dB  
:
USER  
ENG  
–3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9  
dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB  
or 30 dB can be set.  
MASTER  
GAIN  
(FILM MENU)  
KNEE  
APERTURE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the knee  
aperture to ON or OFF.  
At the “ON” setting, the  
detail above the knee  
point is boosted.  
30dB  
S C U F  
S C U F E  
(CAM MENU)  
–6dB  
:
12dB  
:
–6dB, –3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6  
dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24  
dB or 30 dB can be set.  
SLIM DTL  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the mode to  
make the detail finer to  
ON or OFF.  
S C U F E  
30dB  
S C U F  
H. DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting H.DTL (detail)  
level.  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
08  
:
12  
:
ADDITIONAL DTL2 screen  
The special detail features of the camera are set on  
this screen.  
63  
S C U F  
V. DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting V.DTL (detail)  
level.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
12  
:
16  
:
KNEE APE LVL  
0
:
5
USER  
ENG  
For changing the detail  
level in the high-  
brightness areas.  
S C U F E  
DTL GAIN (+)  
–31  
:
+00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For changing the H detail  
level in the “+” direction.  
31  
S C U F  
DTL CORING  
00  
:
05  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting detail signal  
noise removal level.  
+31  
S C U F E  
DTL GAIN (–)  
–31  
:
+00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For changing the H detail  
level in the “–” (bottom)  
direction.  
15  
S C U F  
H. DTL FREQ  
00  
:
22  
:
USER  
ENG  
For selecting H.DTL  
FREQUENCY.  
+31  
S C U F E  
DTL CLIP  
00  
:
47  
:
USER  
ENG  
For changing the clipping  
level of the detail signal.  
31  
S C U F  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
0
:
5
USER  
ENG  
For setting LEVEL  
DEPEND.  
The detail of only the dark  
areas is removed when  
the Y detail is boosted.  
The higher the figure set  
for this item, the broader  
the range of the detail  
which is removed.  
63  
S C U F E  
DTL SOURCE  
(G+B)/2  
(R+G)/2  
(2G+R+B)/4  
(3G+R)/4  
R
USER  
ENG  
For setting the ratio  
between the RGB signal  
components which  
generate the detail signal.  
S C U F  
G
S C U F E  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
:
0.45  
:
USER  
ENG  
Master gamma setting.  
(0.01 step)  
V DTL FREQ.  
360TV  
450TV  
540TV  
630TV  
720TV  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the V. DTL  
FREQUENCY.  
0.75  
S C U F  
S C U F E  
BLACK  
STRETCH  
+3, +2, +1,  
OFF,  
USER  
ENG  
For correcting the black  
level gradation.  
–1, –2, –3  
S C U F  
A
B
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the color  
correction matrix table.  
MATRIX  
TABLE  
OFF  
S C U F  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the 12-axis  
independent color  
COLOR  
CORRECT  
correction to ON or OFF.  
S C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
97  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1 (continued)  
SKIN TONE DTL screen KNEE/LEVEL screen  
The skin tone detail of the camera is set on this The knee settings of the camera are performed on this  
screen.  
screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the skin tone  
detail to ON or OFF.  
MASTER PED  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
–200  
:
+000  
:
+018  
:
+200  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the master  
pedestal level (MASTER  
PED).  
SKIN TONE DTL  
S C U F E  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting zebra in the  
skin tone range to ON or  
OFF.  
At the “ON” setting, the  
amount of detail in the  
zebra viewing range is  
varied.  
SKIN TONE  
ZEBRA  
S C U F E  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the mode when  
the AUTO KNEE switch is  
at OFF.  
MANUAL  
KNEE  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
SKIN DTL  
CORING  
0
:
5
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting detail signal  
noise removal level.  
KNEE POINT  
(FILM MENU)  
30%  
:
65%  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the manual  
knee point position.  
<Note>  
This setting is canceled  
when FILM REC has been  
selected as the CINE  
GAMMA SEL item setting  
on the GAMMA screen.  
7
S C U F E  
90%  
S C U F E  
Y MAX  
000  
:
190  
:
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the maximum  
luminance level at which  
the detail is boosted.  
(CAM MENU)  
80.00%  
:
95.00%  
:
107.00%  
255  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
Y MIN  
000  
:
010  
:
For setting the minimum  
luminance level at which  
the detail is boosted.  
KNEE SLOPE  
(FILM MENU)  
150%  
:
500%  
:
600%  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the manual  
knee slope.  
<Note>  
This setting is canceled  
when FILM REC has been  
selected as the CINE  
GAMMA SEL item setting  
on the GAMMA screen.  
255  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
I CENTER  
000  
:
055  
:
For setting the medium I-  
axis level at which the  
detail is boosted.  
(CAM MENU)  
00  
:
50  
:
255  
S C U F E  
99  
S C U F E  
WHITE CLIP  
I WIDTH  
000  
:
090  
:
For setting the minimum I-  
axis level at which the  
detail is boosted.  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting white clipping  
to ON or OFF.  
S C U F E  
WHITE CLIP LVL 090%  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the white  
clipping level.  
255  
S C U F E  
Q WIDTH  
000  
:
010  
:
For setting the maximum  
Q-axis level at which the  
detail is boosted.  
109%  
S C U F E  
A. KNEE POINT  
80.00%  
:
95.00%  
:
100.00%  
:
107.00%  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the auto knee  
point position.  
(CAM MENU)  
(FILM MENU)  
255  
S C U F E  
Q PHASE  
–31  
:
+00  
:
For setting the minimum  
Q-axis level at which the  
detail is boosted.  
S C U F E  
A. KNEE LVL  
100  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the maximum  
auto knee level.  
+31  
S C U F E  
108  
109  
S C U F E  
A. KNEE  
RESPONSE  
1
2
3
4
USER  
ENG  
For setting the AUTO  
KNEE response rate.  
S C U F E  
<Note>  
The gamma characteristics are set using the KNEE POINT and  
KNEE SLOPE items when VIDEO REC was selected as the CINE  
GAMMA SEL item setting on the GAMMA screen.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
98  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1 (continued)  
GAMMA screen  
CAMERA SETTING screen  
The gamma settings of the camera are performed on The basic settings of the camera are set to ON or OFF  
this screen.  
on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
(FILM MENU)  
0.35  
:
0.45  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the master  
gamma when the unit is to  
be operated in the film  
mode.  
DETAIL  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the detail (H,  
V) to ON or OFF.  
(Both the H detail and V  
detail are simultaneously  
set to either ON or OFF.)  
0.75  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
R GAMMA  
(CAM MENU)  
–15  
:
+00  
:
USER  
ENG  
Amount by which the R  
channel gamma is  
corrected in respect of the  
master gamma level.  
HIGH COLOR  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the mode for  
expanding the dynamic  
range of the colors to ON  
or OFF.  
+15  
At the ON setting, the  
colors above the knee  
point are boosted.  
S C U F E  
B GAMMA  
(CAM MENU)  
–15  
:
+00  
:
USER  
ENG  
Amount by which the B  
channel gamma is  
corrected in respect of the  
master gamma level.  
S C U F E  
GAMMA  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the gamma  
correction to ON or OFF.  
S C U F E  
TEST SAW  
+15  
S C U F E  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the test signal  
to ON or OFF.  
CINE GAMMA  
SEL  
(FILM MENU)  
FILM REC  
VIDEO REC ENG  
USER  
For setting the gamma  
characteristics when the  
unit is to be operated in  
the film mode.  
S C U F E  
FLARE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the flare  
compensation to ON or  
OFF.  
S C U F E  
FILM REC:  
H-F COMPE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the high-range  
frequency compensation  
mode to ON or OFF.  
The cine gamma  
characteristics for films  
are used.  
S C U F E  
VIDEO REC:  
LIGHTING  
(FILM MENU)  
TUNGSTEN USER  
For switching the white  
balance preset value to  
the tungsten lighting type  
or daylight type.  
The cine gamma  
characteristics for video  
are used.  
DAY LIGHT  
ENG  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
BLACK STR. LVL 00%  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the black  
strech level point position.  
<Notes>  
OThis setting is valid  
when FILM REC has  
been selected as the  
CINE GAMMA SEL item  
setting.  
D5600 K  
(CAM MENU)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the 5600 K  
presetting for the white  
balance to ON or OFF.  
<Note>  
The black balance must  
always be adjusted (see  
page 56) when this item’s  
setting has been changed.  
(FILM MENU)  
:
30%  
S C U F E  
OThe KNEE POINT and  
KNEE SLOPE item  
settings on the  
KNEE/LEVEL screen  
are canceled.  
S C U F E  
DYNAMIC LVL  
(FILM MENU)  
200%  
300%  
400%  
500%  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the dynamic  
range.  
<Notes>  
OThis setting is valid  
when FILM REC has  
been selected as the  
CINE GAMMA SEL item  
setting.  
OThe KNEE POINT and  
KNEE SLOPE item  
settings on the  
KNEE/LEVEL screen  
are canceled.  
S C U F E  
<Note>  
The gamma characteristics are set using the BLACK STR. LVL and  
DYNAMIC LVL items when FILM REC has been selected as the  
CINE GAMMA SEL item setting.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
99  
Setting menu screens  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
VF DISPLAY screen  
The information to be displayed inside the viewfinder  
is set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
DISP  
CONDITION  
NORMAL  
HOLD  
USER  
ENG  
NORMAL  
The statuses are  
displayed at all times.  
:
LOW LIGHT LVL  
(FILM MENU)  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the light level  
for the LOW LIGHT  
display when the amount  
of light entering the  
OFF  
20%  
25%  
:
40%  
45%  
HOLD  
:
The statuses are  
displayed when MODE  
CHECK SW is ON.  
camera is too low.  
(CAM MENU)  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
DISP MODE  
1
2
3
USER  
ENG  
Display  
Change  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN DISP.  
(CAM MENU)  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the unit in  
which the synchro scan  
mode is to be displayed.  
1
2
3
FILTER  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
sec  
%
deg  
GAIN  
(FILM MENU)  
AWB  
S C U F E  
AUTO KNEE SW  
SHUTTER  
ABB STATUS  
AWB STATUS  
ECU MENU  
DISP.  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
menu screen is to be  
displayed when menu  
operations are performed  
using the AJ-EC3  
S C U F E  
Extension Control Unit.  
S C U F E  
VF OUT  
Y
NAM  
R
G
B
USER  
ENG  
For selecting VF OUT.  
NAM (N Additive Mix):  
The signal with the highest  
level among the R, G and  
B signals is output.  
S C U F E  
VF DTL  
0
:
4
5
USER  
ENG  
For selecting VF DTL.  
The detail of the signals  
for VF is further boosted.  
At the “0” setting, the  
detail is the same as the  
unit’s.  
S C U F E  
Zebra pattern display  
ZEBRA1  
DETECT  
000%  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the ZEBRA1  
detection level (IRE level).  
ZEBRA 2  
OFF  
(CAM MENU)  
070%  
:
080%  
:
Video level  
ON  
SPOT  
109%  
(FILM MENU)  
109%  
S C U F E  
ZEBRA2  
DETECT  
000%  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the ZEBRA2  
detection level (IRE level).  
085%  
:
109%  
ZEBRA 2  
DETECT  
S C U F E  
ZEBRA2  
ON  
OFF  
SPOT  
USER  
ENG  
For setting ZEBRA2 to ON  
or OFF and selecting  
SPOT. See “Zebra  
pattern display.”  
ZEBRA 1  
DETECT  
<Note>  
When used at the “SPOT”  
setting, ensure that the  
ZEBRA2 DETECT value is  
set higher than the  
0%  
ZEBRA1 DETECT value.  
If the ZEBRA2 DETECT  
value is lower than the  
ZEBRA1 DETECT value,  
the ZEBRA display will not  
appear.  
S C U F E  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
100  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 (continued)  
VF MARKER screen VF INDICATOR screen  
The information to be displayed inside the viewfinder The information to be displayed inside the viewfinder  
is set on this screen.  
is set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
SAFETY ZONE  
OFF  
1
:
3
:
12  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the safety  
zone display.  
EXTENDER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the extender  
display to ON or OFF.  
S C U F E  
SHUTTER  
1
: 80% and 90% corner  
display  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the shutter  
speed display to ON or  
OFF.  
2
3
4
: 80% corner display  
: 90% corner display  
: 80% and 90% box  
display  
S C U F E  
FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the filter No.  
display to ON or OFF.  
S C U F E  
WHITE  
5
6
7
: 80% box display  
: 90% box display  
: 80% and 90% corner  
display in 4:3 mode  
: 80% corner display in  
4:3 mode  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the AWB  
PRE/A/B display to ON or  
OFF.  
S C U F E  
GAIN  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the currently  
selected gain display to  
ON or OFF.  
8
9
S C U F E  
: 90% corner display in  
4:3 mode  
IRIS  
S
USER  
ENG  
S
: Only the super iris ON  
10 : 80% and 90% box  
display in 4:3 mode  
11 : 80% box display in  
4:3 mode  
12 : 90% box display in  
4:3 mode  
IRIS  
S+IRIS  
OFF  
status is displayed.  
IRIS: Only the aperture  
value is displayed.  
S+IRIS: Both the super iris  
ON status and the  
aperture value are  
displayed.  
OFF: Neither the super iris  
ON status nor the  
aperture value is  
displayed.  
S C U F E  
CENTER MARK  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the center  
marker display to ON or  
OFF.  
S C U F E  
FRAME SIG  
4 : 3  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the frame  
marker display.  
(VISTA = 1 : 1.85)  
(CNSCO = 1 : 2.35)  
S C U F E  
13 : 9  
14 : 9  
VISTA  
CNSCO  
CAMERA ID  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the ID display  
during color bar  
displaying.  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
ZOOM LVL  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the zoom  
position value display to  
ON or OFF.  
MARK  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the frame  
marker display to ON or  
OFF.  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
COLOR TEMP  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the color  
temperature display to ON  
or OFF.  
LVL  
00  
:
15  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the picture  
levels on the outside of  
the frame marker.  
S C U F E  
FRAME RATE  
S C U F E  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the frame rate  
display to ON or OFF.  
S C U F E  
VERSION ID  
(FILM MENU)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For displaying the gamma  
curve used when the  
internal color bar signal  
recording mode is  
established.  
S C U F E  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
101  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 (continued)  
CAMERA ID screen  
SHUTTER SPEED screen  
On this screen, the shutter speed to be used is  
selected from among the POSITION items each of  
which contains a shutter speed which was set on the  
SHUTTER SELECT screen.  
The camera ID is set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
ID 1:  
2222222222  
ENG  
For inputting the camera  
ID (max. 10 characters).  
<Note>  
Select whether this setting  
is to be mixed by selecting  
ON or OFF for CAMERA  
ID on the VF DISPLAY  
screen.  
==  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
ID 2:  
2222222222  
Item  
Remarks  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN 1  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For selecting SYNCHRO  
SCAN 1.  
ID 3:  
2222222222  
S C U F E  
C U F E  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN 2  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For selecting SYNCHRO  
SCAN 2.  
1. Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the ID 1:,  
ID 2: or ID 3: item.  
S C U F E  
POSITION 1  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For selecting POSITION 1.  
For selecting POSITION 2.  
For selecting POSITION 3.  
For selecting POSITION 4.  
For selecting POSITION 5.  
For selecting POSITION 6.  
2. When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor) moves  
to the ID input area, and the input mode is established.  
S C U F E  
POSITION 2  
ON  
OFF  
S C U F E  
POSITION 3  
3. Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the character to  
ON  
OFF  
be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed is switched in  
the following sequence:  
Space: 3  
S C U F E  
POSITION 4  
ON  
OFF  
S C U F E  
POSITION 5  
7
ON  
OFF  
letters: A—Z  
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –  
S C U F E  
POSITION 6  
ON  
OFF  
S C U F E  
4. Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
5. Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the next  
position (right), and repeat steps 3 and 4 to input the characters  
(maximum of 10).  
6. When the characters have been input, turn the JOG dial button  
to move the arrow (cursor) to the “:” position.  
m
2222222222  
ID1:  
7. When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor) returns  
to the ID 1:, ID 2: or ID 3: item.  
2222222222  
ID1:  
ID2:  
ID3:  
n
<Note>  
The contents are cleared when the READ FACTORY DATA is  
executed. The data will be stored in the memory even when OFF  
has been selected for ECU DATA SAVE.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
102  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 (continued)  
SHUTTER SELECT screen  
A shutter speed is set in each POSITION item on this  
screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN 2  
90.0 deg  
:
180.0 deg  
:
225.0 deg  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
SYNCHRO SCAN 2.  
POSITION 4 SEL 180.0 deg  
172.8 deg  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
POSITION 4.  
144.0 deg  
(FILM MENU)  
120.0 deg  
90.0 deg  
45.0 deg  
1/100  
S C U F E  
POSITION 1 SEL  
(FILM MENU)  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
POSITION 1.  
180.0 deg  
172.8 deg  
144.0 deg  
120.0 deg  
90.0 deg  
45.0 deg  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
(CAM MENU)  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
S C U F E  
POSITION 5 SEL 180.0 deg  
172.8 deg  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
POSITION 5.  
(CAM MENU)  
1/120  
1/250  
144.0 deg  
120.0 deg  
1/500  
(FILM MENU)  
90.0 deg  
45.0 deg  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/2000  
S C U F E  
POSITION 2 SEL 180.0 deg  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
POSITION 2.  
(FILM MENU)  
172.8 deg  
144.0 deg  
120.0 deg  
90.0 deg  
45.0 deg  
1/100  
(CAM MENU)  
S C U F E  
POSITION 6 SEL 180.0 deg  
172.8 deg  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
POSITION 6.  
(CAM MENU)  
1/120  
144.0 deg  
1/250  
120.0 deg  
1/500  
90.0 deg  
1/1000  
(FILM MENU)  
45.0 deg  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/2000  
S C U F E  
POSITION 3 SEL 180.0 deg  
172.8 deg  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
POSITION 3.  
(FILM MENU)  
144.0 deg  
120.0 deg  
90.0 deg  
45.0 deg  
1/100  
1/1000  
1/2000  
(CAM MENU)  
S C U F E  
1/120  
(CAM MENU)  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
S C U F E  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
103  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 (continued)  
! LED screen  
CAMERA SW MODE screen  
The modes of the camera switches are set on this  
screen.  
The display of the  
viewfinder is set to ON or OFF on this screen.  
lamp which appears inside the  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
FILTER INH  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting whether or  
not the data in the AWB  
memories (channel A,  
channel B) is to be held  
for each filter.  
GAIN (0 dB)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the gain level is  
other than 0 dB.  
S C U F E  
GAIN (–3 dB)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the gain level is  
other than –3 dB.  
ON:  
Only the channel A and  
channel B memories (2  
memories) regardless of  
the filter.  
S C U F E  
SHUTTER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the shutter is ON.  
OFF  
:
The data is held for each  
of the filters (4a2 = 8  
memories).  
S C U F E  
WHITE PRESET ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when PRESET is selected  
as the AWB channel  
setting.  
S C U F E  
SHOCKLESS  
AWB  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the  
SHOCKLESS AWB  
setting.  
“SHOCKLESS AWB”  
means that the switching  
of the WHITE BAL switch  
to A, B or PRST is not  
accompanied by a shock.  
FAST (high-speed:  
NORMAL  
SLOW  
FAST  
S C U F E  
EXTENDER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the lens has been  
set to the EXTENDER  
mode.  
S C U F E  
FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when a filter other than  
3200 K is used.  
approx. 0.5 sec.),  
NORMAL (normal speed:  
approx. 1 sec.) or SLOW  
(slow: approx. 3 sec.) can  
be set for this effect.  
S C U F E  
BLACK STR  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when black stretch has  
been set to ON.  
S C U F E  
COLOR BARS  
SMPTE  
FULL BARS ENG  
USER  
For selecting the color bar  
signals.  
S C U F E  
SMPTE  
:
DAY LIGHT  
(FILM MENU)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the white balance  
preset value is the daylight  
type.  
SMPTE color bars  
FULL BARS  
:
Full color bars  
S C U F E  
S. GAIN OFF  
S.GAIN  
L/M/H  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the method  
for releasing the super  
gain mode.  
S C U F E  
D5600 K  
(CAM MENU)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the preset white  
balance level is 5600 K.  
S.GAIN  
:
The mode is released by  
the super gain switch  
only.  
S C U F E  
MATRIX  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when matrix has been set  
to ON.  
L/M/H  
:
The mode is released by  
changing the L/M/H  
switch setting.  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
COLOR  
CORRECTION  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when color correction has  
been set to ON.  
S C U F E  
FRAME RATE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the frame rate less  
than 11 fps is used.  
S C U F E  
<Note>  
When ON has been selected for both GAIN (0 dB) and GAIN (–3  
dB), the  
dB.  
lamp will light at all gain levels except for –3 dB and 0  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
104  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 (continued)  
CAMERA SW MODE screen  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
USER1 SW  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
USER  
ENG  
For allocating the functions  
in USER1 button.  
<Notes>  
S. BLK LVL  
OFF  
–10  
–20  
–30  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the super black  
level.  
INH  
S.GAIN  
S.IRIS  
S.BLK  
B.STR  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
Y GET  
RET SW  
F.RATE  
OWhen B.STR has been  
selected as this item’s  
setting, the function for  
setting the black level  
gradation compensation  
to +3 is allocated.  
OWhen Y GET has been  
selected as this item’s  
setting, the function for  
measuring the output  
luminance level is  
S C U F E  
ECU DATA  
SAVE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
ON : The data controlled  
by the AJ-EC3  
extension control  
unit is stored in the  
memory.  
OFF : The data is not  
stored in the  
memory.  
S C U F E  
AUTO KNEE SW ON  
(FILM MENU)  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
OFF  
AUTO KNEE function is to  
be made operational when  
the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE  
switch on the side panel  
has been set to the CAM  
AUTO KNEE ON position.  
allocated.  
The output luminance  
level of the area near  
the center marker in the  
viewfinder is displayed  
in percentage units in  
the middle of the  
viewfinder screen for  
approximately 3  
seconds.  
S C U F E  
(CAM MENU)  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
:
The AUTO KNEE  
function is made  
operational.  
OFF : The AUTO KNEE  
function is not made  
operational.  
S C U F E  
USER2 SW  
(CAM MENU)  
USER  
ENG  
For allocating the functions  
in USER2 button.  
S C U F E  
INH  
S.GAIN  
S.IRIS  
S.BLK  
<Notes>  
OWhen B.STR has been  
selected as this item’s  
setting, the function for  
setting the black level  
gradation compensation  
to +3 is allocated.  
OWhen Y GET has been  
selected as this item’s  
setting, the function for  
measuring the output  
luminance level is  
B.STR  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
Y GET  
RET SW  
F.RATE  
(FILM MENU)  
allocated.  
The output luminance  
level of the area near  
the center marker in the  
viewfinder is displayed  
in percentage units in  
the middle of the  
viewfinder screen for  
approximately 3  
seconds.  
S C U F E  
<Note>  
When the same function has been allocated to both the USER1  
button and the USER2 button, please use the USER2 button.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
105  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 (continued)  
SUPER GAIN screen  
FRAME MODE screen  
The frame rate is set on this screen.  
The gain allocated to the SUPER GAIN switch is set  
on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
FRAME RATE  
RANGE  
60-12  
60-4  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the variable  
range of the frame rate.  
60-12:  
S. GAIN VALUE  
18dB  
24dB  
30dB  
36dB  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the gain  
when the SUPER GAIN  
switch is pressed.  
60 fps to 12 fps  
60-4:  
S C U F E  
60 fps to 4 fps  
S C U F E  
FRAME RATE  
(CAM MENU)  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the frame rate.  
<Note>  
60  
:
24  
:
When “60-12” has been  
selected as the FRAME  
RATE RANGE setting, the  
frame rate cannot be set to  
11 fps or below.  
(FILM MENU)  
4
S C U F E  
SCAN REVERSE ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
This function is for  
correcting the images  
when the prime lens is  
used.  
ON  
:
The images are  
corrected (by  
reversing their top  
and bottom and their  
left and right).  
OFF : The images are not  
corrected.  
S C U F E  
USER SW  
FRAME RATE  
60  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the frame rate  
to be allocated to the  
24  
:
USER1 or USER2 button.  
12  
S C U F E  
Using the USER1 or USER2 button to switch the  
frame rate  
OOnce the desired frame rate has been set in a  
USER (USER1 or USER2) button by performing  
menu operations, subjects can be shot at the set  
frame rate simply by pressing the USER button.  
The original frame rate is restored when the USER  
button is pressed again.  
OWhile recording is in progress, the frame rate will  
not be switched even when the USER button is  
pressed.  
OWhen the frame rate has been switched using the  
USER button, the switched rate will not take effect  
even if one of the synchro scan switches (“+” or “– ”)  
is pressed after the JOG dial button is pressed.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
106  
Setting menu screens  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3  
CAM CARD READ/WRITE screen  
CAM CARD R/W SELECT screen  
The settings for saving (writing) the menu data on the SD  
memory card, loading (reading) the data from the card,  
and configuring the card are performed on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
CAM MAIN  
MENU1 LEVEL  
R/W  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 1 (items other  
than those marked with })  
data saving/loading when  
writing data onto the SD  
memory card or loading  
data from it to ON or OFF.  
ON : The data is  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
SELECT  
1
:
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the number  
of the file to be loaded.  
8
F E  
READ  
USER  
ENG  
For loading the data from  
the SD memory card.  
==  
recorded/loaded.  
OFF : The data is not  
recorded/loaded.  
SELECT  
1
:
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the number  
of the file to be saved.  
<Note>  
8
F E  
See page 89 for  
information on the items  
marked with }.  
WRITE  
USER  
ENG  
For saving the camera’s data  
on the SD memory card.  
==  
==  
==  
E
CAM MAIN  
MENU1 SW (})  
R/W  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 1 (items  
marked with }) data  
saving/loading when  
writing data onto the SD  
memory card or loading  
data from it to ON or OFF.  
ON : The data is  
CARD CONFIG  
TITLE READ  
USER  
ENG  
For formatting the SD  
memory card.  
USER  
ENG  
For reading the titles given  
to the data saved on the  
SD memory card.  
READ USER  
DATA  
USER  
ENG  
For loading the user area  
data of the camera’s  
memory.  
==  
recorded/loaded.  
OFF : The data is not  
recorded/loaded.  
TITLE 1:  
to  
TITLE 8:  
USER  
ENG  
A title consisting of up to 8  
characters can be given to  
each file.  
¢¢¢¢¢¢  
¢¢  
E
E
E
E
CAM MAIN  
MENU2 R/W  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2 data  
saving/loading when  
writing data onto the SD  
memory card or loading  
data from it to ON or OFF.  
ON : The data is  
recorded/loaded.  
OFF : The data is not  
recorded/loaded.  
CAM CARD R/W SELECT screen  
The settings for saving (recording) specific menu data  
on the SD memory card and loading (reading) the data  
from the card are performed on this screen.  
CAM MAIN  
MENU3 R/W  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 3 data  
saving/loading when  
writing data onto the SD  
memory card or loading  
data from it to ON or OFF.  
ON : The data is  
recorded/loaded.  
OFF : The data is not  
recorded/loaded.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
ID READ/WRITE ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting camera ID  
saving/loading when  
writing data onto the SD  
memory card or loading  
data from it to ON or OFF.  
ON : The camera ID is  
recorded/loaded.  
OFF : The camera ID is not  
recorded/loaded.  
Example:  
CAM MAIN  
MENU4 R/W  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 4 data  
saving/loading when  
writing data onto the SD  
memory card or loading  
data from it to ON or OFF.  
ON : The data is  
recorded/loaded.  
OFF : The data is not  
recorded/loaded.  
If the CAMERA ID  
contents are not to be  
changed when SD memory  
card data is saved/loaded,  
select OFF as the ID  
READ/WRITE setting.  
E
<Notes>  
OIWhen the frame frequency setting has been changed, it is  
necessary to restart the unit by turning the POWER switch to OFF  
and then to ON again for the setting to be switched.  
E
OItem  
setting.  
will be saved regardless of the ECU DATA SAVE  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
107  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3 (continued)  
LENS FILE screen GENLOCK/IRIS screen  
The lens files are stored into the unit’s internal The genlock and iris control settings are performed on  
memory and read from the memory on this screen. this screen.  
The white shading data and flare adjustment data are  
stored together as a lens file.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
H PHASE  
COARSE  
00  
:
15  
USER  
ENG  
For coarsely adjusting the  
H phase during genlock.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
FILE SELECT  
1
:
8
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the number  
of the file to be read or  
written.  
H PHASE FINE  
00  
:
64  
USER  
ENG  
For finely adjusting the H  
phase during genlock.  
S
U F  
E
READ  
USER  
ENG  
For reading the lens files.  
==  
==  
==  
A. IRIS LEVEL  
000  
:
050  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the auto iris  
target level.  
WRITE  
USER  
ENG  
For writing the lens files.  
The brightness (iris) is  
controlled using this value.  
The higher the value  
selected, the higher the  
brightness.  
100  
RESET ALL  
USER  
ENG  
For returning all the data  
from lens files 1 to 8 to the  
factory setting.  
S C U F E  
A. IRIS  
PEAK/AVE  
000  
:
050  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the ratio  
between the auto iris peak  
and average value.  
The closer the setting is to  
0, the greater the  
TITLE 1: -  
TITLE 8:  
USER  
ENG  
For enabling titles each  
consisting of a maximum  
of 12 characters to be set  
for the files.  
¢¢¢¢¢¢  
¢¢¢¢¢¢  
100  
tendency toward average  
control; conversely, the  
closer the setting is to  
100, the greater the  
tendency toward peak  
control.  
<Note>  
When RESET ALL is executed, the white shading adjustment value  
and the flare setting value are reset to the factory default values.  
S C U F E  
LENS FILE (CARD R/W) screen  
A. IRIS MODE  
NORM1  
NORM2  
CENTR  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the auto iris  
mode.  
The contents of the eight lens files recorded in the  
internal memory are written on the SD memory card  
on this screen. Alternatively, the lens files written on  
the SD memory card are read into the internal memory  
on this screen.  
NORM1  
:
The light is measured for  
the entire screen (except  
for the edges).  
NORM2  
:
The light is measured for  
the entire screen (except  
for the top part).  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
CENTR  
:
CARD FILE  
SELECT  
1
:
8
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the number of  
the file to be read from the  
SD memory card or written  
on the SD memory card.  
The light is measured in  
the center area of the  
screen only.  
S C U F E  
S
U F  
E
S. IRIS LEVEL  
000  
:
080  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the super iris  
target level.  
(Backlight compensation  
mode)  
READ  
USER  
ENG  
For reading lens files from  
the SD memory card.  
==  
==  
WRITE  
USER  
ENG  
For writing lens files to the  
SD memory card.  
100  
S C U F E  
IRIS GAIN  
CAM  
LENS  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the iris  
gain is to be adjusted by  
the camera or lens.  
TITLE 1: -  
TITLE 8:  
USER  
ENG  
For enabling titles each  
consisting of a maximum  
of 12 characters to be set  
for the files.  
¢¢¢¢¢¢  
¢¢¢¢¢¢  
S C U F E  
IRIS GAIN  
VALUE  
01  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the iris gain  
adjustment value.  
06  
:
10  
S C U F E  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
108  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3 (continued)  
LENS ADJ screen  
The lens adjustments are performed on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
F2.8 ADJ  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For outputting the voltage  
output only when ON is  
selected as this item’s  
setting.  
F16 ADJ  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For outputting the voltage  
output only when ON is  
selected as this item’s  
setting.  
<Note>  
When using a lens which enables the open limit and close limit of  
the lens aperture to be adjusted, set “F2.8ADJ” or “F16ADJ” to ON,  
and repeatedly adjust so that the lens aperture will be set to “F2.8”  
or “F16.”  
(This adjustment need not be performed if the lens does not have  
this adjustment function.)  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
109  
Setting menu screens  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 1, 2 and 3 screens  
The settings for registering the items (the same as the ones on the FILM or CAM MAIN MENU 1, 2 and 3  
screens) allocated to the SUB menus to the SUB MENU screen are performed on this screen.  
¢
Registration ON ( ) or OFF () is set at the head of each item.  
Up to 42 camera unit items can be registered.  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 1 FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 2  
screen  
screen  
VF  
display  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
ROP  
ENG  
Index for opening the ROP screen.  
VF DISPLAY  
ENG  
Index for opening the VF DISPLAY  
screen.  
LOW SETTING  
MID SETTING  
HIGH SETTING  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the LOW SETTING  
screen.  
VF MARKER  
VF INDICATOR  
!LED  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the VF MARKER  
screen.  
Index for opening the MID SETTING  
screen.  
Index for opening the VF INDICATOR  
screen.  
Index for opening the HIGH SETTING  
screen.  
Index for opening the !LED screen.  
ADDITIONAL  
DTL1  
Index for opening the ADDITIONAL  
DTL1 screen.  
CAMERA SW  
MODE  
Index for opening the CAMERA SW  
MODE screen.  
ADDITIONAL  
DTL2  
Index for opening the ADDITIONAL  
DTL2 screen.  
SUPER GAIN  
Index for opening the SUPER GAIN  
screen.  
SKIN TONE DTL ENG  
Index for opening the SKIN TONE  
DTL screen.  
FRAME MODE  
Index for opening the FRAME MODE  
screen.  
KNEE/LEVEL  
GAMMA  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the KNEE/LEVEL  
screen.  
Index for opening the GAMMA screen.  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 3  
screen  
CAMERA  
SETTING  
Index for opening the CAMERA  
SETTING screen.  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
CAM CARD  
READ/WRITE  
ENG  
Index for opening the CAM CARD  
READ/WRITE screen.  
CAM CARD R/W ENG  
SELECT  
Index for opening the CARD R/W  
SELECT screen.  
LENS FILE  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the LENS FILE  
screen.  
LENS FILE  
(CARD R/W)  
Index for opening the LENS FILE  
(CARD R/W) screen.  
GENLOCK/IRIS  
Index for opening the GENLOCK/IRIS  
screen.  
110  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4 (continued)  
BLACK SHADING screen COLORIMETRY screen  
The black shading adjustments are performed on this The luminance signal standard is selected on this  
screen.  
screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
DETECTION  
ENG  
ENG  
For execution of the digital  
shading compensation.  
MATRIX  
SMPTE-274 ENG  
SMPTE-240  
NTSC  
For selecting the  
luminance signal  
standard.  
==  
F E  
CORRECT (DIG) ON  
OFF  
For setting the digital  
shading compensation to  
ON or OFF.  
S C U F E  
WHITE SHADING screen  
INITIALIZE screen  
The white shading adjustments are performed on this  
screen.  
The film or camera menu settings are initialized and  
scene files are saved on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
DETECTION  
(V SAW)  
ENG  
For executing vertical  
white shading  
compensation.  
==  
READ FACTORY  
DATA  
ENG  
For restoring the film or  
camera menu data  
settings to the factory  
settings.  
==  
==  
CORRECT  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For setting the shading  
compensation to ON or  
OFF.  
WRITE USER  
DATA  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For saving the user’s own  
film or camera menu data  
in the unit’s memory.  
S C U F E  
SCENE SEL  
1
:
4
For designating the  
number of the scene file.  
F E  
FLARE screen  
The camera’s flare settings are performed on this  
screen.  
READ  
For loading the scene file  
whose SCENE SEL was  
designated.  
==  
==  
==  
WRITE  
RESET  
For saving data in the  
scene file whose SCENE  
SEL was designated.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
R FLARE  
000  
ENG  
For setting the R channel  
flare; the preset value  
differs from one camera to  
another.  
For restoring the scene file  
data settings to the factory  
settings.  
:
100  
E
E
E
TITLE 1  
TITLE 2  
TITLE 3  
TITLE 4  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the title in  
scene file No.1.  
==  
==  
==  
==  
G FLARE  
B FLARE  
000  
:
100  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the G channel  
flare; the preset value  
differs from one camera to  
another.  
For setting the title in  
scene file No.2.  
For setting the title in  
scene file No.3.  
000  
:
100  
For setting the B channel  
flare; the preset value  
differs from one camera to  
another.  
For setting the title in  
scene file No.4.  
<Notes>  
<Note>  
OSince SYSTEM FREQ may change as a result of executing the  
READ FACTORY DATA, turn the power off and then back on  
again.  
The white shading adjustment value and the flare setting value can  
be written to the internal memory as a lens file.  
E
OItem  
setting.  
will be saved regardless of the ECU DATA SAVE  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
111  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4 (continued)  
DIAGNOSTIC screen  
OPTION screen  
The usage statuses and software versions are  
displayed on this screen.  
The engineer menu display is selected on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
ENG SECURITY ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For selecting whether to  
display the engineer  
menu.  
CAMSOFT (IN)  
ENG  
For displaying the version  
of the software for the  
built-in flash memory.  
==  
ON : The engineer menu  
is not displayed.  
CAMSOFT (OUT)  
ENG  
For displaying the version  
of the software for the  
external flash memory.  
==  
OFF : The engineer menu  
is displayed.  
U F E  
SHD, ABB SW  
CTRL  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For selecting whether to  
automatically correct black  
shading when the AUTO W/B  
BAL switch is pressed  
CAM TABLE  
PLD (CAM)  
ENG  
ENG  
For displaying the version  
of the gamma table.  
==  
==  
For displaying the version  
of the software for the  
continuously for 8 seconds or  
more on the ABB side.  
camera system computer.  
ON : Black shading is  
PLD (SHD)  
PLD (FM)  
ENG  
ENG  
For displaying the version  
of the software for the  
shading.  
==  
==  
corrected automatically.  
OFF : Black shading is not  
corrected automatically.  
U F E  
For displaying the version  
of the software program  
for the frame memory.  
AWB AREA  
25%  
50%  
90%  
ENG  
ENG  
For selecting the white  
balance search area.  
U F E  
AWB & ABB  
OFFSET  
ON  
OFF  
For setting how gain and  
pedestal values, which are  
set on the ROP screen of  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU  
1, are to be processed  
after auto white balance  
and auto black balance  
are performed.  
EVALUATION screen  
The items which are measured for evaluation  
purposes are set on this screen.  
(S/N, MODULATION, RESOLUTION, SENSITIVITY)  
VF  
display  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Settings are added.  
The values are reset  
to zero.  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
U F E  
S/N  
ENG  
Index for opening the S/N  
measurement screen.  
CAM MENU SEL VIDEO MENU ENG  
FILM MENU  
For setting the unit’s  
operation mode.  
VIDEO MENU:  
The unit is set to the  
video mode.  
When VIDEO MENU is  
selected, the FILM  
USER MENU and FILM  
MAIN MENU displays  
will be changed to CAM  
USER MENU and CAM  
MAIN MENU.  
MODULATION  
RESOLUTION  
SENSITIVITY  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the modulation  
measurement screen.  
Index for opening the resolution  
measurement screen.  
Index for opening the sensitivity  
measurement screen.  
FILM MENU:  
The unit is set to the film  
mode.  
<Note>  
When setting this item on  
the AJ-EC3 extension  
control unit, after switching  
to this item first, then turn  
ECU DATA SAVE item  
ON on the CAM SW  
MODE screen in FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU2.  
C U F E  
<Notes>  
OFor details on how to release ENG SECURITY, consult your  
nearest service center.  
E
OItem  
setting.  
will be saved regardless of the ECU DATA SAVE  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
112  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4 (continued)  
OPTION screen  
EVALUATION screen  
OS/N measurement screen  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
The S/N measurements are performed on this screen.  
SYSTEM FREQ. 59.94Hz  
ENG  
For setting the unit’s frame  
frequency.  
60.00Hz  
U F E  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
EVF SEL  
MONO  
COLOR  
ENG  
The EVF terminal video  
signal will be switched.  
MONO:  
Only the Y signal is  
output to the EVF  
connecter.  
S/N  
ON  
ENG  
For setting the S/N  
measurement.  
DETAIL  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the DETAIL to  
ON or OFF.  
COLOR:  
H-F COMPE.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the high-  
frequency compensation  
to ON or OFF.  
The Y, Pb, and Pr  
signals are output to the  
EVF connecter.  
Currently there is no  
viewfinder to support  
this.  
GAMMA  
MATRIX  
FLARE  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the GAMMA to  
ON or OFF.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the MATRIX to  
ON or OFF.  
U F E  
SUPER DTL  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For selecting the kind of  
detail to be provided.  
ON:  
A stronger detail than  
usual is provided.  
OFF:  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the FLARE to  
ON or OFF.  
M. PED  
–200  
:
For adjusting the master  
pedestal level.  
+140  
:
+200  
The same level of detail  
as usual is provided.  
U F E  
<Notes>  
OWhen the frame frequency setting has been changed, it is  
necessary to restart the unit by turning the POWER switch to OFF  
and then to ON again for the setting to be switched.  
OWhen MONO has been selected as the EVF SEL item setting, the  
marker displays are set on the VF MARKER screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 2. When COLOR has been selected instead,  
they are set using MONITOR MARKER on the VTR MAIN MENU  
screen. Furthermore, when COLOR is selected, the EVF ZEBRA  
and EVF DETAIL functions no longer work.  
OModulation measurement screen  
The modulation measurements are performed on  
this screen.  
OWhen setting SUPER DTL to ON, please adjust the H.DTL  
LEVEL, H.DTL FREQ and DTL CLIP values. Also, please adjust  
the V.DTL LEVEL according to these values.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
MODULATION  
ON  
ENG  
For setting the modulation  
measurement.  
E
OItem  
setting.  
will be saved regardless of the ECU DATA SAVE  
DETAIL  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the DETAIL to  
ON or OFF.  
H-F COMPE.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the high-  
frequency compensation  
to ON or OFF.  
GAMMA  
MATRIX  
FLARE  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the GAMMA to  
ON or OFF.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the MATRIX to  
ON or OFF.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the FLARE to  
ON or OFF.  
M. PED  
–200  
:
For adjusting the master  
pedestal level.  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
+000  
:
+018  
:
+200  
<Note>  
The EVALUATION screen items are returned to their default  
settings as soon as the menu is exited.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
113  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4 (continued)  
OResolution measurement screen  
The resolution measurements are performed on  
this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
RESOLUTION  
ON  
ENG  
For setting the resolution  
measurement.  
DETAIL  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the DETAIL to  
ON or OFF.  
H-F COMPE.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the high-  
frequency compensation  
to ON or OFF.  
GAMMA  
MATRIX  
FLARE  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the GAMMA to  
ON or OFF.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the MATRIX to  
ON or OFF.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the FLARE to  
ON or OFF.  
M. PED  
–200  
:
For adjusting the master  
pedestal level.  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
+000  
:
+018  
:
+200  
OSensitivity measurement screen  
The sensitivity measurements are performed on  
this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
SENSITIVITY  
ON  
ENG  
For setting the sensitivity  
measurement.  
KNEE  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the KNEE to  
ON or OFF.  
W. CLIP  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the white clip  
to ON or OFF.  
M. PED  
–200  
:
For adjusting the master  
pedestal level.  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
+000  
:
+018  
:
+200  
114  
Setting menu screens  
VTR MENUS  
VTR MAIN MENU screen  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
FUNCTION  
ENG  
Index for opening the FUNCTION  
screen.  
BATTERY/  
TAPE  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the BATTERY/TAPE  
screen.  
BATTERY  
SETTING  
Index for opening the BATTERY  
SETTING screen.  
VTR VF  
INDICATOR  
Index for opening the VTR VF  
INDICATOR screen.  
MIC/AUDIO  
Index for opening the MIC/AUDIO  
screen.  
TC/UB  
Index for opening the TC/UB screen.  
TIME/DATE  
Index for opening the TIME/DATE  
screen.  
VTR USER  
MENU SELECT  
Index for opening the VTR USER  
MENU SELECT screen.  
VTR CARD  
READ/WRITE  
Index for opening the VTR CARD  
READ/WRITE screen.  
VTR INITIALIZE ENG  
Index for opening the VTR INITIALIZE  
screen.  
DIAGNOSTIC  
ENG  
Index for opening the VTR  
DIAGNOSTIC screen.  
115  
Setting menu screens  
VTR MAIN MENU  
FUNCTION screen  
The VTR’s functions are set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
NEWS REC  
MODE  
OFF  
0.2  
:
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the VTR  
START button  
acknowledgment time  
during recording.  
INTERVAL REC  
MODE  
ON  
USER  
For selecting the  
intermittent recording  
mode.  
ON: Intermittent recording  
is performed.  
ONE SHOT ENG  
OFF  
2.0  
OFF  
:
The pressing of the VTR  
START button is  
acknowledged  
immediately, recording is  
stopped, and the unit is set  
to the REC PAUSE mode.  
ONE SHOT: Intermittent  
recording is performed  
once and then stopped.  
OFF: Intermittent recording  
is not performed.  
<Note>  
0.2—2.0  
:
Intermittent recording is set  
OFF when the unit’s power  
switch has been set to ON.  
The pressing of the VTR  
START button is not  
acknowledged and  
recording is continued for  
the time set (in increments  
of 0.2 sec.).  
F
INTERVAL REC  
TIME  
00s10f  
:
59s29f  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the REC time for  
intermittent recording.  
<Note>  
When REC time is set at  
less than 1 second, the  
initial recording time will  
be 1 second.  
C U F  
HUMID OPE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the VTR  
operation when  
condensation has formed.  
ON : Operation is  
continued as usual.  
OFF : Operation of all  
controls except the  
POWER switch and  
EJECT button is  
C U F  
INTERVAL  
00h00m02s  
:
23h59m59s  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the REC  
PAUSE time for  
intermittent recording.  
PAUSE TIME  
C U F  
ECU REC CHK  
SW  
R. REVIEW USER  
RETAKE  
For selecting the unit  
operation when the REC  
CHK button on the AJ-  
EC3 extension control unit  
is pressed.  
R. REVIEW:  
Rec review is performed.  
RETAKE:  
ENG  
inhibited.  
C U F  
REC START  
ALL  
NORMAL  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting  
acknowledgement of recording  
started by the VTR START  
button.  
ALL:  
Retake is performed,  
then playback.  
The start of the recording is  
acknowledged regardless of  
the VTR mode.  
C U F  
CHARACTER  
ON SDI  
MENU  
STATUS  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the item to  
be superimposed on the  
SDI output signals.  
MENU:  
The menu screen is  
superimposed.  
NORMAL:  
The start of the recording is  
acknowledged only in the  
STOP (POWER SAVE) mode  
and REC PAUSE mode.  
C U F  
STATUS:  
PAUSE TIMER  
10  
20  
30  
60  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the amount of  
time REC PAUSE is to be held.  
10/20/30/60: 10, 20, 30 or 60  
minutes.  
The menu screen and  
viewfinder status display  
are superimposed.  
<Note>  
C U F  
Neither of these items will  
be superimposed when  
the CHARACTER switch  
on the side panel is set to  
OFF.  
RETAKE MODE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
Functions for rewinding  
the tape to the position  
where recording started.  
ON : The RETAKE  
function works.  
C U F  
OFF : The RETAKE  
function does not  
work.  
COMPRESSION NORMAL  
MODE DARK  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the DVCPRO  
compression mode.  
NORMAL:  
Normal shooting is  
conducted in this mode.  
DARK:  
This modes reduces the  
distortion in the compressed  
images which occurs in the  
dark areas of the images.  
However, the distortion in  
the compressed images in  
other areas may be  
<Note>  
The RETAKE function is  
set OFF when the unit’s  
power switch has been set  
to ON.  
C
F
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
increased.  
C U F  
116  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU (continued)  
BATTERY/TAPE screen  
BATTERY/TAPE screen  
Select the settings which match the type of battery  
used on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
The warning tone which signals the remaining battery  
charge and remaining tape and which is heard during  
shooting can be switched off if they prove to be  
distracting.  
BATT NEAR  
END ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the warning  
tone heard when the  
battery is near the end of  
its charge to ON or OFF.  
C U F  
BATT NEAR  
END CANCEL  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For switching the function  
which cancels the warning  
tone heard when the  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
battery is near the end of  
its charge to ON or OFF  
using the MODE switch.  
BATTERY  
SELECT  
AJ-BP490  
AU-BP402  
PRO14  
TRIM14  
TRIM13  
DIGITAL14  
DIONIC90  
DIONIC160  
BP-H90  
BP-H100  
NP-L50  
ENDURA50  
ENDURA-D  
BP-L60/90  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the type of  
battery used.  
AJ-BP490 : AJ-BP490  
battery  
AU-BP402 : AU-BP402  
battery  
C U F  
BATT END  
ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the warning  
tone heard when the  
battery is at the end of its  
charge to ON or OFF.  
PRO14  
TRIM14  
TRIM13  
: Anton/Bauer  
PRO14 battery  
: Anton/Bauer  
TRIM14 battery  
: Anton/Bauer  
TRIM13 battery  
C U F  
BATT REMAIN  
FULL  
100%  
70%  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the battery  
capacity at which “FULL”  
is to appear on the LCD  
display window as the  
remaining battery display  
(for all 7 segments to be  
lighted).  
DIGITAL14 : Anton/Bauer  
DIGITAL  
battery (14V)  
DIONIC90 : Anton/Bauer  
DIONIC90  
C U F  
TAPE NEAR  
END ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the warning  
tone heard when the end  
of the tape is near to ON  
or OFF.  
DIGITAL  
battery  
C U F  
DIONIC160: Anton/Bauer  
DIONIC160  
TAPE NEAR  
END TIME  
3min  
2min  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the remaining  
tape time for which the  
warning tone is to be  
heard when the end of the  
tape is near.  
DIGITAL  
battery  
BP-H90  
: IDX BP-H90  
C U F  
battery  
BP-H100 : IDX BP-H100  
TAPE END  
ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the warning  
tone heard when the tape  
has reached its end to ON  
or OFF.  
battery  
NP-L50  
: IDX NP-L50  
C U F  
battery  
ENDURA50 : IDX  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the time for  
one segment of the  
remaining tape display  
indicated on the LCD  
display window.  
3min/$ : One segment is  
set to 3 minutes.  
5min/$ : One segment is  
set to 5 minutes.  
TAPE REMAIN/$ 3min/  
$
$
5min/  
ENDURA50  
battery  
ENDURA-D  
:
When mounting  
the V-mount  
adapter plate  
made by IDX to  
use a digital  
battery  
C U F  
BP-L60/90 : Sony BP-  
L60/90 battery  
C U F  
EXT DC IN  
SELECT  
AC-ADPT  
AJ-BP490  
AU-BP402  
PRO14  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the power  
source to be connected to  
the DC IN socket.  
TRIM14  
BP-H90  
BP-H100  
BP-L60/90  
C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
117  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU (continued)  
BATTERY SETTING screen  
MONITOR MARKER screen  
The type of battery to be used is selected and its Using the menu settings on this screen, it is possible  
settings are performed on this screen.  
to select the display used for the safety zone and other  
markers for the HD SDI MON connector and also for  
the EVF connector when COLOR has been selected  
as the EVF SEL item setting on the OPTION menu  
from FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
AJ-BP490  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
ENG  
For setting the AJ-BP490  
and the PACO HP-90A  
battery.  
C U F  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
AU-BP402  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the AU-BP402  
battery.  
C U F  
SAFTY ZONE  
16:9  
4:3  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the safety  
zone (90%).  
PRO14  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the  
Anton/Bauer PRO14  
battery.  
OFF  
C U F  
C U F  
CENTER MARK  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting ON or OFF  
for the center marker  
display.  
TRIM14  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the  
Anton/Bauer TRIM14  
battery.  
C U F  
C U F  
FRAME SIG  
4:3  
14:9  
USER  
ENG  
For switching the frame  
marker display.  
TRIM13  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the  
Anton/Bauer TRIM13  
battery.  
VISTA  
CNSCO  
VISTA : 1:1.85  
CNSCO: 1:1.235  
C U F  
C U F  
DIGITAL14  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the  
Anton/Bauer digital battery  
(14V).  
MARK  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting ON or OFF  
for the frame marker  
display.  
C U F  
C U F  
DIONIC90  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the  
Anton/Bauer DIONIC90  
digital battery.  
<Note>  
Set the marker displays to appear on a regular black-and-white  
viewfinder on the VF MARKER screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU  
2.  
C U F  
DIONIC160  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the  
Anton/Bauer DIONIC160  
digital battery.  
C U F  
BP-H90  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the IDX BP-  
H90 battery.  
C U F  
BP-H100  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the IDX BP-  
H100 battery.  
C U F  
NP-L50  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the IDX NP-  
L50 battery.  
C U F  
ENDURA50  
C U F  
ENDURA-D  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the IDX  
ENDURA50 battery.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For use when mounting  
the V-mount adapter plate  
made by IDX to use a  
digital battery  
C U F  
BP-L60/90  
C U F  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
ENG  
For setting the Sony BP-  
L60/90 battery.  
1. Either “¢” or “” appears in front of each item to indicate whether  
the item is set to ON or OFF.  
¢ : ON  
: OFF  
2. Each time the JOG dial button is pressed, the setting moves in  
the following sequence:  
ON/OFF setting  
7
AUTO/MANUAL setting  
AUTO  
: The NEAR END voltage value preset in each battery  
is used.  
MANUAL : The NEAR END voltage setting for each battery can  
be changed.  
7
NEAR END voltage setting  
7
Item movement  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
118  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU (continued)  
VTR VF INDICATOR screen  
The information to be displayed in the viewfinder is set  
on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
TAPE (IND)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For switching the  
remaining tape display to  
ON or OFF.  
COMPRESSION ON  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the compression  
mode display to ON or OFF.  
ON: “COMP” appears at  
the top right when  
DARK has been  
(IND)  
OFF  
C U F  
BATTERY (IND)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For switching the battery  
voltage display to ON or  
OFF.  
selected as the  
COMPRESSION  
setting on the  
C U F  
LEVEL METER  
(IND)  
CH1  
CH1•CH2  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting what the  
audio level meter is to  
display.  
CH1: The level of the CH1  
signals only is displayed.  
CH1•CH2: The levels of  
both the CH1 and CH2  
signals are displayed.  
OFF: No display.  
FUNCTION screen.  
OFF: The compression  
mode is not  
displayed.  
C U F  
SAVE LED  
SAVE&TAPE  
SAVE  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the operation  
of the SAVE lamp.  
SAVE  
:
C U F  
This lights when the VTR  
SAVE/STBY switch has  
been set to SAVE.  
It goes off during  
AUDIO IN (IND)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For switching the audio  
input display to ON or OFF.  
ON: The audio input is  
displayed.  
OFF: The audio input is not  
displayed.  
recording.  
SAVE&TAPE  
:
C U F  
This lights when the VTR  
SAVE/STBY switch has  
been set to SAVE.  
It goes off during  
recording.  
When the tape is  
TC (IND)  
TCG  
TCR  
TCG/TCR  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting what the  
time code is to display.  
TCG: The time code  
generated by the time  
code generator is  
approaching its end, it  
flashes in tandem with  
the warning alarm that  
sounds when tape-end is  
approaching.  
displayed in the E-E  
mode.  
TCR: The time code reader  
value is displayed in the  
V-V mode.  
C U F  
TCG/TCR: The time code  
generated by the time  
code generator is  
displayed in the E-E  
mode; the time code  
reader value is displayed  
in the V-V mode.  
OFF: The time code is not  
displayed.  
MIC/AUDIO screen  
The MIC/AUDIO settings are performed on this  
screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
C U F  
Item  
Remarks  
VTR WARNING  
(IND)  
ALWAYS  
NORMAL  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting when the  
VTR’s warnings are to be  
displayed.  
FRONT MIC  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
ON : The phantom power  
is supplied to the  
ALWAYS: The warning  
display always appears  
when a warning has  
occurred.  
front microphone.  
OFF : The phantom power  
is not supplied to the  
front microphone.  
C U F  
NORMAL: The display  
appears for 3 seconds  
after the warning  
occurred and for 3  
seconds after recording  
was started or  
completed.  
OFF: The warning displays  
do not appear.  
C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
119  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU (continued)  
MIC/AUDIO screen  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
MIC LOWCUT  
CH1  
FRONT  
REAR  
F&R  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the high-pass  
filter for the CH1 mic input.  
FRONT:The high-pass filter  
for the front mic  
CUE SELECT  
SIDE SW  
CH1  
CH2  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the audio  
signals to be recorded on  
the cue track.  
OFF  
MIX  
SIDE SW:  
input is set to ON.  
REAR: The high-pass filter  
for the rear mic  
The signals selected by  
the CUE switch on the  
side panel are recorded.  
input is set to ON.  
CH1  
:
F&R  
:
The high-pass  
filters for both the  
front and rear mic  
inputs are set to  
ON.  
The CH1 signals are  
recorded.  
CH2  
:
The CH2 signals are  
recorded.  
OFF  
:
The high-pass filter  
for the CH1 input is  
set to OFF.  
MIX  
:
The CH1 and CH2  
mixed signals are  
recorded.  
C U F  
C U F  
MIC LOWCUT  
CH2  
FRONT  
REAR  
F&R  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the high-pass  
filter for the CH2 mic input.  
FRONT:The high-pass filter  
for the front mic  
EMBEDDED  
AUDIO (60 Hz)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
embedded audio signals  
are to be output to the HD  
SDI MON connector and  
HD SDI EE connector  
when 60.00 Hz has been  
selected as the frame  
frequency setting.  
OFF  
input is set to ON.  
REAR: The high-pass filter  
for the rear mic  
input is set to ON.  
F&R  
:
The high-pass  
filters for both the  
front and rear mic  
inputs are set to  
ON.  
The high-pass filter  
for the CH2 input is  
set to OFF.  
ON  
:
The embedded  
audio signals are  
output.  
OFF : The embedded  
audio signals are not  
OFF  
:
output.  
C U F  
C U F  
A/V SYNCHRO  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
At low frame rates, the  
images lag behind the  
sound. This item is used  
to select whether this lag  
is to be adjusted.  
LIMITER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For switching the audio  
limiter to ON or OFF.  
ON : The limiter operates.  
OFF : The limiter does not  
operate.  
ON:  
C U F  
The lag is adjusted so  
that the timing of the  
images is more or less  
in synchronization with  
the timing of the sound.  
OFF:  
The lag is not adjusted.  
The same operations as  
in previous models are  
performed.  
TEST TONE  
NORMAL  
ALWAYS  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
NORMAL:  
The test tone signal is  
output when the AUDIO  
IN switch for CH1 is set  
to front while BAR is  
selected as the  
CHSEL  
CAM/BAR switch setting.  
ALWAYS  
:
The test tone signal is  
always output when BAR  
is selected as the  
C U F  
<Notes>  
CAM/BAR switch setting.  
OWhen ON has been selected as the A/V SYNCHRO item setting,  
noise may be carried on the audio signals at those moments  
when the frame rate is switched.  
OThe timing of the images and the timing of the sound are fixed  
while recording is in progress. This means that these two timings  
may not be in synchronization when the frame rate is switched  
during recoding even when ON has been selected as the A/V  
SYNCHRO item setting.  
OAt frame rates of 12P and less, it is not possible for the timing of  
the images and the timing of the sound to be in synchronization  
even when ON has been selected as the A/V SYNCHRO item  
setting. The 12P timing will be fixed.  
OFF  
:
The test tone signal is  
not output.  
CHSEL  
:
The test tone signal is  
output for the selected  
channel when the  
AUDIO IN switch CH1 or  
CH2 is set to front while  
BAR is selected as the  
CAM/BAR switch setting.  
C U F  
<Note>  
The frequency characteristics in the MIC LOWCUT ON mode are  
200 Hz to 10 kHz.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
120  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU (continued)  
TC/UB screen  
The time code and user bits settings are performed on  
this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
TC MODE  
DF  
NDF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the time code  
to the DF or NDF mode.  
DF : The time code is set  
to the drop frame  
TCG SET HOLD ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the operation  
of TCG when the TCG  
SET 5 power OFF 5  
power ON 5 REC  
operations are performed.  
ON : The TCG setting is  
stored when the  
mode.  
NDF: The time code is set  
to the non-drop  
frame mode.  
<Note>  
power is turned off,  
and is not  
This unit will perform the  
processing in the non-drop  
frame mode when the  
frame rate has been set to  
24 fps.  
regenerated.  
OFF : The TCG setting is  
not stored when the  
power is turned off,  
but is regenerated.  
C U F  
C U F  
FIRST REC TC  
REGEN  
PRESET  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the TC REGEN  
mode when recording is  
started.  
UB MODE  
USER  
DATE  
TIME  
EXT  
USER  
ENG  
For setting what is to be  
written as the user bits in  
the LTC area.  
USER : User setting (fixed).  
DATE : Real time value for  
year/month/day/  
hours.  
REGEN  
:
The time code set on the  
tape is regenerated.  
However, when the  
frame rate has been set  
to 24 fps, the time code  
on the tape in those  
parts where the drop  
frame mode was  
TCG  
TIME : Real time value for  
hours/minutes/  
seconds.  
EXT : The UBG value is  
slave-locked when  
a TC signal is  
established will not be  
regenerated.  
supplied from an  
external source.  
(The user setting is  
used when no  
external input is  
supplied.)  
PRESET  
:
The time code set on the  
tape is not regenerated.  
However, it is forcibly  
regenerated when the  
unit is transferred from  
the rec-pause mode to  
the recording mode.  
TCG  
:
Time code  
generator value  
<Note>  
C U F  
Set the time on the  
TIME/DATE menu screen  
when using the UB MODE  
item with real-time  
operation.  
<Note>  
When USER is set for the UB MODE item, it is not possible to set  
EXT for the VITC UB MODE item.  
Similarly, it is not possible to set EXT for the UB MODE item when  
USER has been set for the VITC UB MODE item.  
C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
This unit automatically stores as the tape management information both the frame rate information which indicates the shooting speed and  
the active frame information which indicates the first frame where the frame image was switched in the user bits of the sub-code track area  
(this used to be the LTC area). This information is output from the TC OUT connector, HD SDI MON connector and HD SDI EE connector.  
Further, the active frame information is stored in the least significant digit of the user bits while the frame rate information is stored in its  
lower third and fourth digits.  
<Notes>  
OWhen “DATE,” “TCG” or “USER” has been selected as the UB MODE item setting on the TC/UB screen, the tape management  
information is output from the least significant digit to the lower fourth digit of the user bits, so no other user bits information will be  
output.  
OThe tape management information is not output as the user bits information in the VIDEO AUX area (this used to be the VITC area).  
121  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU (continued)  
TC/UB screen  
The time code and user bits settings are performed on  
this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
P. OFF LCD  
DISPLAY  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
LCD display is to appear  
when the power is OFF.  
ON : The LCD display  
appears even when  
the power is OFF.  
OFF : The LCD display  
does not appear  
VITC UB MODE  
USER  
DATE  
TIME  
EXT  
USER  
ENG  
For setting what is to be  
written as the user bits in  
the VITC area.  
USER : User setting (fixed).  
DATE : Real time value for  
year/month/day/  
TCG  
hours.  
TIME : Real time value for  
hours/minutes/  
when the power is  
OFF.  
seconds.  
The power-saving mode is  
established.  
EXT : The UBG value is  
slave-locked when  
a TC signal is  
C U F  
TC OUT  
TCG  
TCG/TCR  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the time  
code which is to be output  
to the time code output  
connector.  
supplied from an  
external source.  
(The user setting is  
used when no  
external input is  
supplied.)  
TCG  
:
The time code generated  
by the time code  
generator is output at all  
times.  
TCG : Time code  
generator value  
<Notes>  
TCG/TCR  
:
O Set the time on the  
TIME/DATE menu  
screen when using the  
UB MODE item with  
real-time operation.  
OThe tape management  
information is not  
output as the user bits  
information in the  
VITC area.  
The time code generated  
by the time code  
generator is output in the  
E-E mode; the time code  
reader value is output in  
the V-V mode.  
C U F  
C U F  
TC DISP SEL  
24F  
25F  
30F  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the number of  
frames to be displayed per  
second in the time code  
frame digits.  
24F: 0 to 23 frames will be  
displayed per second.  
25F: 0 to 24 frames will be  
displayed per second.  
30F: 0 to 29 frames will be  
displayed per second.  
C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
122  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU (continued)  
TIME DATE screen  
VTR INITIALIZE screen  
The time/date settings are performed on this screen.  
The VTR MENU settings are initialized and the user  
data is saved on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
YEAR  
00—05—99 ENG  
For setting the year.  
READ FACTORY  
DATA  
ENG  
For returning the menu  
data to the factory  
settings.  
==  
MONTH  
DAY  
1 — 12  
1 — 31  
0 — 23  
0 — 59  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the month.  
For setting the day.  
WRITE VTR  
USER DATA  
ENG  
For saving the VTR MENU  
data inherent to the user  
into the unit’s memory.  
==  
HOUR  
MINUTE  
For setting the hours.  
For setting the minutes.  
DIAGNOSTIC screen  
The use statuses and software versions are displayed  
on this screen.  
For entering the time and  
date.  
==  
$ TIME/DATE  
SET  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
OPERATION  
ENG  
Operating time with power  
ON.  
==  
==  
==  
==  
VTR USER MENU SELECT screen  
This is the index screen for opening the screens  
containing the items to be registered on the VTR unit’s  
USER MENU.  
DRUM RUNNING  
THREADING  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Number of hours the drum  
has rotated.  
Number of times tapes  
have been loaded.  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
VTR SYSCON  
For displaying the version  
of the system  
microcomputer.  
FUNCTION  
ENG  
Index for opening the FUNCTION  
screen.  
SERVO  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For displaying the version  
of the servo  
microcomputer.  
==  
==  
==  
BATTERY/TAPE ENG  
Index for opening the BATTERY/TAPE  
screen.  
MONITOR  
MARKER  
ENG  
Index for opening the screen  
(MONITOR MARKER) on which to set  
the markers for the HD SDI MON  
connector and color EVF.  
MECHACON  
FRONT  
For displaying the version  
of the mechanism control  
microcomputer.  
For displaying the version  
of the LCD panel drive  
microcomputer.  
VTR VF  
ENG  
Index for opening the VTR VF  
INDICATOR screen.  
INDICATOR  
SDI IF  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For displaying the version  
of the SDI IF FPGA.  
==  
==  
==  
MIC/AUDIO  
TC/UB  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the MIC/AUDIO  
screen.  
AUDIO  
CODEC  
For displaying the version  
of the AUDIO FPGA.  
Index for opening the TC/UB screen.  
For displaying the version  
of the CODEC FPGA.  
VTR CARD READ/WRITE screen  
The settings for saving the menu data onto the SD  
memory card and loading the data from it are  
performed on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
READ  
ENG  
For loading the VTR data  
from the SD memory card.  
==  
==  
==  
WRITE  
ENG  
ENG  
For saving the VTR data  
onto the SD memory card.  
READ USER  
DATA  
For loading the VTR user  
area data contained in the  
unit’s internal memory.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
123  
Setting menu screens  
VTR USER MENU SELECT  
¢
ON ( ) or OFF () is set on this screen to determine which items are to be registered on the USER MENU  
screen.  
The maximum number of VTR unit items which can be registered is 14.  
FUNCTION screen  
BATTERY/TAPE screen  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
NEWS REC  
MODE  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the NEWS REC MODE  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
BATT NEAR  
END ALARM  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the BATT NEAR END  
ALARM item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
HUMID OPE  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the HUMID OPE item  
on the USER MENU  
screen.  
BATT NEAR  
END CANCEL  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the BATT NEAR END  
CANCEL item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
REC START  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the REC START item  
on the USER MENU  
screen.  
BATT END  
ALARM  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the BATT END ALARM  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
PAUSE TIMER  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the PAUSE TIMER item  
on the USER MENU  
screen.  
BATT REMAIN  
FULL  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the BATT REMAIN  
FULL item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
RETAKE MODE  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the RETAKE MODE  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
TAPE NEAR  
END ALARM  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TAPE NEAR END  
ALARM item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
INTERVAL REC  
MODE  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the INTERVAL REC  
MODE item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
TAPE NEAR  
END TIME  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TAPE NEAR END  
TIME item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
INTERVAL REC  
TIME  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the INTERVAL REC  
TIME item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
TAPE END  
ALARM  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TAPE END ALARM  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
INTERVAL  
PAUSE TIME  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the INTERVAL PAUSE  
TIME item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TAPE REMAIN/$  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
TAPE REMAIN /$  
C U F  
C U F  
ECU REC CHK  
SW  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the ECU REC CHK SW  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
MONITOR MARKER screen  
C U F  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
CHARACTER  
ON SDI  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the CHARACTER ON  
SDI item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
Item  
Remarks  
SAFETY ZONE  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the SAFETY MENU  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
C U F  
COMPRESSION  
MODE  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the COMPRESSION  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
C U F  
CENTER MARK  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the CENTER MARK  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
BATTERY/TAPE screen  
FRAME SIG  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the FRAME SIG item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
C U F  
MARK  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the MARK item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
BATTERY  
SELECT  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the BATTERY SELECT  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
EXT DC IN  
SELECT  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the EXT DC IN  
SELECT item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
C U F  
124  
Setting menu screens VTR USER MENU SELECT (continued)  
¢
ON ( ) or OFF () is set on this screen to determine which items are to be registered on the USER MENU  
screen.  
The maximum number of VTR unit items which can be registered is 14.  
VTR VF INDICATOR screen  
MIC/AUDIO screen  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
TAPE (IND)  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the TAPE (VF  
INDICATOR) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
CUE SELECT  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the CUE SELECT item  
on the USER MENU  
screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
BATTERY (IND)  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the BATTERY (VF  
INDICATOR) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
EMBEDDED  
AUDIO (60Hz)  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the EMBEDDED  
AUDIO (60Hz) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
LEVEL METER  
(IND)  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the LVEL METER (VF  
INDICATOR) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
A/V SYNCHRO  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the A/V SYNCHRO item  
on the USER MENU  
screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
AUDIO IN (IND)  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the AUDIO IN (VF  
INDICATOR) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
TC/UB screen  
C U F  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
TC (IND)  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TC (VF  
INDICATOR) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
Item  
Remarks  
TC MODE  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the TC MODE item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
C U F  
VTR WARNING  
(IND)  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the VTR WARNING (VF  
INDICATOR) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
C U F  
UB MODE  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the UB MODE item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
COMPRESSION  
(IND)  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the COMPRESSION  
(VF INDICATOR) item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
TCG SET HOLD  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TCG SET HOLD item  
on the USER MENU screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
FIRST REC TC  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the FIRST REC TC item  
on the USER MENU screen.  
SAVE LED  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the SAVE LED item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
P.OFF LCD  
DISPLAY  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the P.OFF LCD  
DISPLAY item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
MIC/AUDIO screen  
C U F  
TC OUT  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the TC OUT item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
C U F  
FRONT MIC  
POWER  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the FRONT MIC  
POWER item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
VITC UB MODE  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the VITC UB MODE item  
on the USER MENU screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
TC DISP SEL  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TC DISP SEL item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
MIC LOWCUT  
CH1  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration of  
the MIC LOWCUT CH1 item  
on the USER MENU screen.  
C U F  
C U F  
MIC LOWCUT  
CH2  
¢
For setting the registration of  
the MIC LOWCUT CH2 item  
on the USER MENU screen.  
C U F  
LIMITER  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the LIMITER item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
C U F  
TEST TONE  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TEST TONE item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
125  
Warning system  
When a problem is detected immediately after the  
power is turned on or during operation, the user is  
alerted to the trouble by the display window (LCD),  
WARNING lamp and the lamps inside the viewfinder  
and also by warning tones heard from the speaker or  
earphone.  
$ SLACK  
$ RF  
LCD display  
LCD display  
The RF display flashes (during recording).  
OThe SLACK display flashes.  
OAn error code is displayed where the  
time code is normally displayed.  
WARNING lamp  
The lamp flashes four times a second  
(during recording).  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes four times a second.  
The lamp flashes four times a second.  
The alarm sounds continuously.  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes four times a second  
(during recording).  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
The alarm sounds four times a second  
(during recording).  
The SLACK display lights for 3 seconds.  
The RF display comes on (during  
recording).  
What the warning  
indicates  
The warning points to a problem in the  
tape take-up.  
What the warning  
indicates  
The video heads are clogged.  
The warning points to a problem in the  
recording system.  
VTR unit’s operation The VTR unit stops.  
When a solenoid problem has been  
detected, the power is turned off.  
VTR unit’s operation Head clogging is detected, and the alarm  
tone is sounded.  
(The LCD warning display continues.)  
Remedial action  
Check the error code (see page 128) in  
the display window, and consult your  
nearest service center.  
The cleaning roller is activated and the  
heads are cleaned (for at least 10  
seconds).  
Recording continues but the signals may  
not be recorded properly.  
The warning display is held until the rec-  
pause mode is established. It goes off as  
soon as the unit is transferred from the  
rec-pause mode.  
Remedial action  
Clean the heads.  
If the signals cannot be recorded properly  
after cleaning, turn off the power, and  
consult your nearest service center.  
$ REC WARNING  
$ SERVO  
LCD display  
“00:00:00:11” appears where the time  
code is normally displayed (for at least 5  
seconds during recording).  
LCD display  
The SERVO display lights (during  
recording and playback).  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes four times a second  
(during recording and playback).  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes four times a second (for  
at least 3 seconds during recording).  
The lamp flashes four times a second  
(during recording and playback).  
The lamp flashes four times a second (for  
at least 3 seconds during recording).  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
The alarm sounds four times a second  
(during recording and playback).  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
The alarm sounds four times a second  
(for at least 3 seconds during recording).  
The SERVO display lights for 3 seconds.  
(during recording and playback).  
The REC WARNING display flashes (for  
at least 3 seconds during recording).  
What the warning  
indicates  
The servo operation is disturbed.  
What the warning  
indicates  
The warning points to a problem in the  
recording control signal.  
VTR unit’s operation Operation continues but the unit may not  
VTR unit’s operation Recording continues but the signals may  
not be recorded properly while the  
operate properly.  
Remedial action  
Turn off the power, and consult your  
nearest service center. When tape travel  
starts, the warning display may flash for a  
moment and go off: this is normal and not  
indicative of a malfunction.  
warning is displayed.  
Remedial action  
The warning points to a problem with the  
control signal inside the unit.  
Consult your nearest service center.  
126  
Warning system (continued)  
$ HUMID  
LCD display  
$ TAPE END  
LCD display  
The HUMID display lights.  
All the segments flash.  
Even after condensation detection has  
been released, it will continue to flash  
once a second for the next 80 minutes.  
TAPE  
E
F
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp lights (during stop and in the  
standby OFF mode).  
WARNING lamp  
The lamp lights when condensation has  
been detected.  
The lamp flashes 4 times a second  
(during stop and in the standby OFF  
mode).  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes four times a second.  
Warning alarm  
Operation differs depending on the setting  
selected for HUMID OPE on the setting  
menu.  
OWhen the ON setting has been selected,  
the alarm sounds four times a second  
while recording is being performed.  
When recording is not being performed,  
it sounds continuously.  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
The alarm sounds continuously (during  
stop and in the standby OFF mode).  
OThe SAVE lamp flashes four times a  
second during stop and in the standby  
OFF mode (when SAVE&TAPE has  
been selected as the setting for the  
SAVE LED item on the VTR VF  
OWhen the OFF setting has been  
selected, the alarm does not sound.  
INDICATOR screen of VTR MENU).  
=
O“ ” lights (during stop and in the  
Viewfinder  
The HUMID display lights for 3 seconds.  
Condensation has formed.  
standby OFF mode).  
What the warning  
indicates  
What the warning  
indicates  
The tape has come to its end.  
VTR unit’s operation The VTR unit’s operation differs depending  
on the setting selected for HUMID OPE on  
the setting menu.  
VTR unit’s operation If recording, playback or fast forwarding is  
in progress, the operation is stopped.  
Remedial action  
Rewind the tape.  
Alternatively, replace the cassette tape.  
OWhen the ON setting has been selected,  
the VTR unit continues to operate.  
OWhen the OFF setting has been  
selected, the VTR unit continues with the  
recording, but this operation will stop if  
the tape sticks. Operation stops  
immediately when an operation other  
than recording is being performed.  
$ BATTERY NEAR END  
LCD display  
E
F
BATT  
For 80 minutes after condensation  
This segment flashes.  
detection is released, the drum will rotate  
however no other operation is possible.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes once a second.  
The lamp flashes once a second.  
Remedial action  
Stop the tape travel, and turn off the power.  
If the HUMID display fails to go off even  
when the power is turned off and back on,  
wait until it goes off.  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
The alarm sounds four times a second.  
The BATT display flashes once a second.  
The battery is near the end of its charge.  
What the warning  
indicates  
$ TAPE NEAR END  
LCD display  
VTR unit’s operation The VTR unit continues to operate.  
Remedial action Replace the battery if necessary.  
This segment flashes.  
TAPE  
E
F
$ BATTERY END  
LCD display  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes once a second (during  
recording).  
E
F
BATT  
The lamp flashes once a second (during  
recording).  
All the segments flash.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp lights.  
Warning alarm  
The alarm sounds once a second (during  
recording).  
This can be switched on the setting menu.  
The lamp flashes once a second.  
The alarm sounds continuously.  
The BATT display lights.  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
OThe remaining tape display flashes  
once a second (in the E-E mode).  
OThe SAVE lamp flashes in tandem with  
the warning alarm (when SAVE&TAPE  
has been selected as the setting for the  
SAVE LED item on the VTR VF  
What the warning  
indicates  
The battery is at the end of its charge.  
VTR unit’s operation All operation is stopped and the tape is  
unloaded.  
INDICATOR screen of VTR MENU).  
Only cassette eject operation is possible.  
=
O“ ” flashes once a second (three  
Remedial action  
Replace the battery.  
seconds during recording).  
What the warning  
indicates  
The tape is approaching its end.  
VTR unit’s operation The VTR unit continues to operate.  
Remedial action Replace the cassette tape if necessary.  
127  
Emergency eject  
If the cassette cannot be ejected by pressing the  
EJECT button, use a screwdriver or similar tool to  
press and turn the EMERGENCY screw. This  
enables the cassette to be removed.  
While pushing in with the screwdriver, turn the  
EMERGENCY screw counterclockwise until the  
tape is ejected.  
OThis screw needs to be rotated through about 20  
turns after the first turn until the unloading can  
be started.  
3
Set the power to OFF.  
1
OThis screw needs to be rotated through about 90  
turns after the first turn until the tape is ejected.  
Remove the rubber cap where shown in the figure.  
Insert a Phillips head screwdriver into the cross-  
shaped part of the EMERGENCY screw (red).  
2
Remove the cassette.  
4
5
Set the power to OFF.  
Return the rubber cap to its original position.  
1
Cassette  
4
holder  
<Notes>  
ODo not turn the EMERGENCY screw except in an  
emergency.  
ODo not turn the screw clockwise. Stop turning the  
screw as soon as the tape is ejected. Otherwise,  
the mechanism may be damaged.  
OAfter the tape is ejected, the cassette holder will not  
lock into place even when an attempt is made to  
close it. Be sure to turn the power off and turn it  
back on to reset the mechanism’s operation, and  
then close the cassette holder.  
OA clicking sound will be heard when the  
EMERGENCY screw is turned: this sound is made  
by the reel drive operation and is therefore not  
indicative of a malfunction.  
2,5  
EMERGENCY  
screw  
Push in and turn at the same time.  
3
OThis screw needs to be rotated through about 20 turns after the first turn until the unloading can be started.  
OThis screw needs to be rotated through about 90 turns after the first turn until the tape is ejected.  
Error codes  
One of the following error codes appears in the  
display window when an error has occurred in the unit  
for some reason.  
Code No.  
Description of error  
Pinch solenoid problem  
04  
08  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
38  
3F  
61  
Cleaning solenoid problem  
Supply reel problem  
Take-up reel problem  
Capstan problem  
Cylinder problem  
Loading problem  
Servo transmission problem  
Camera transmission problem  
Audio initialization problem/Temporary power  
outage.  
6F  
11  
Reference signal problem  
Video initialization problem  
128  
Maintenance  
Condensation  
Head cleaning  
The water vapor in the air may form as tiny droplets  
on the head drum when the unit is moved from a cold  
location to a warm location or used in a very humid  
place. This phenomenon is known as condensation,  
and running the tape under these conditions is liable  
to cause the tape to stick to the drum.  
Use the AJ-CL12LP cleaning cassette if the heads  
need to be cleaned.  
Take care to read the  
instructions accompanying the cleaning tape since the  
video heads may be damaged if the tape is not used  
in the correct way.  
Note the following points:  
Cleaning inside the viewfinder  
ODo not use thinners or any other solvent to remove  
ORemove the tape when the unit’s operation is to be  
started in conditions where condensation may form.  
OBefore loading the tape, set the power switch to  
ON, and check that the HUMID display is not  
lighted in the display window.  
dirt.  
OUse a lens cleaner available on the market to wipe  
the lens.  
ONEVER wipe the mirror.  
<Note>  
For safety reasons, the HUMID display will flash and  
the drum will rotate for 80 minutes after condensation  
detection is released.  
During this time, the operation buttons cannot be  
operated.  
If dirt or dust has found its way onto the mirror,  
remove it using an air blower available on the  
market.  
Phenomena inherent to CCD  
cameras  
Check that the HUMID display  
is not lighted.  
Smear  
This phenomenon may occur when very bright  
subjects are shot.  
The faster the electronic shutter speed, the more likely  
that it will occur.  
White blemish  
This phenomenon is caused by small white spots  
when dark places are shot. The lower the frame rate  
or the higher the gain, the more noticeable it  
becomes.  
Replacing the backup battery  
The backup battery is already installed when the unit  
is shipped.  
When it has discharged, the “BACK UP BATT  
EMPTY” display appears for 3 seconds on the  
viewfinder screen when the POWER switch is set to  
ON.  
Moreover, the time code value of the TCG will be set  
to “00:00:00:00” and the backup of the time code  
value will no longer be possible: this means that the  
backup battery should be replaced.  
Consult with your nearest service center, and replace  
the spent battery with a new battery (CR2032 or  
BR2032).  
CAUTION:  
Backup battery  
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified  
service personel only. To reduce the risk of electric  
shock, do not perform any servicing other than that  
contained in the operaiting instructions unless you  
are qualified to do so.  
129  
Connectors and signals  
AUDIO IN  
GND  
AUDIO IN (H)  
AUDIO IN (C)  
ECU  
CAM CONT (RX)  
CAM DATA (TX)  
NC  
ECU ON  
UNREG 12V  
GND  
DC IN  
GND  
NC  
NC  
+12V  
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
Matsushita part number K1AB103A0007  
Maker part number  
HA16PRM-3SG  
(Hirose Denki)  
Matsushita part number K1AA104H0024  
Maker part number  
HA16RX-4P(SW1)  
(Hirose Denki)  
PUSH  
Matsushita part number K1AB106J0010  
Maker part number  
HR10A-7R-6SC  
(Hirose Denki)  
1
2
2
1
3
6
4
1
2
3
3
4
5
<Note>  
Ensure that the polarities are used  
correctly for a power supply from  
an external source.  
<Note>  
The maximum output current of the  
power supply is 0.3 A.  
AUDIO OUT  
GND  
L CH OUT (H)  
L CH OUT (C)  
R CH OUT (H)  
R CH OUT (C)  
1
2
3
4
5
FRONT MIC IN  
DC OUT  
GND  
1
2
3
GND  
AUDIO IN(H)  
AUDIO IN(C)  
1
2
3
4
NC  
NC  
Matsushita part number K1AA105H0007  
Matsushita part number K1AB103A0007  
+12V OUT  
Maker part number  
HA16RD-5P  
Maker part number  
HA16PRM-3SG  
(Hirose Denki)  
(Hirose Denki)  
Matsushita part number VJS3824A004  
Maker part number  
HR10A-7R-4SC  
(Hirose Denki)  
1
2
1
5
4
3
1
4
2
3
3
2
<Note>  
The maximum output current of the  
power supply is 1.5 A.  
130  
Connectors and signals (continued)  
LENS  
RET-SW  
VTR-S/S  
UNREG GND  
AT-MA  
ID-CO  
UNREG+12V  
IP-B  
EVF  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UNREG+12V  
UNREG+12V  
A+9.0V  
AGND  
AGND  
VF-Y  
VF-Y GND  
VF-CLK  
VF-WR  
AT-RE  
EXT-ANS  
10 ZOOM-POS  
11 NC  
12 NC  
10 VF-DATA  
11 UNREG GND  
12 ZEBRA-SW  
13 PEAKING  
14 A+9.0V  
Matsushita part number K1AB112J0006  
Maker part number  
HR10A-10R-125C  
(Hirose Denki)  
15 VF-PR  
16 VF-PB  
17 SW3  
18 FRONT-VR  
19 VF-GND  
20 UNREG-GND  
2
3
1
4
11  
12  
10  
9
5
8
7
6
<Note>  
Matsushita part number K1AB120H0001  
Maker part number  
The maximum output current of the  
power supply is 1.0 A.  
HR12-14RA-20SC  
1
6
11  
16  
2
7
12  
17  
3
8
13  
18  
4
5
10  
15  
20  
9
14  
19  
<Note>  
The maximum output current of the  
power supply is 1.0 A.  
<Note>  
Take care to ensure that the total sum of the current taken out from the DC OUT, ECU, EVF and LENS  
connectors does not exceed 3 A.  
131  
Inspections prior to shooting  
Preparation for inspection  
Inspecting the camera unit  
Perform the following inspections prior to shooting to  
check that the systems are operating properly.  
It is recommended that the images be checked using  
a color monitor.  
Set the camera unit’s switches as shown in the figure  
below.  
VTR SAVE/STBY: STBY  
OUTPUT/AUTO  
KNEE: BARS  
Insert a fully charged battery.  
1
Set the POWER switch to ON, and check that the  
2
HUMID display has not come on and that at least 5  
segments of the BATTERY display are lighted.  
OIf the HUMID display has come on, wait until it  
goes off.  
OIf fewer than 5 segments of the BATTERY  
display have lighted, replace the battery with  
one having an adequate charge.  
After checking that there are no cables near the  
cassette holder or top panel, press the EJECT  
button to open the cassette holder.  
3
WHITE BAL:  
A or B  
GAIN: Normally set to 0 dB; change  
Aperture: Automatic  
Zoom: Automatic  
to a more suitable value if the  
picture is too dark.  
After checking the following points, load the  
4
cassette tape and close the cassette holder.  
OThe cassette tape must not be set to the  
accidental erasure prevention mode.  
OThere must be no tape slack.  
3
4
2
2
1
132  
Inspections prior to shooting (continued)  
Inspecting the viewfinder  
Adjust the position of the viewfinder.  
Set both the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to  
FRONT, and set LEVEL METER on the VTR VF  
INDICATOR screen of VTR MENU to CH1.  
Check when sound is input from the microphone  
connected to the MIC IN jack on the lens that the  
audio level is displayed on the viewfinder screen.  
Check when LEVEL METER on the VTR VF  
INDICATOR screen of VTR MENU is set to OFF  
that the audio level display is cleared from the  
viewfinder screen.  
1
2
8
Check that the color bar signals are displayed on  
the viewfinder screen, and adjust the BRIGHT,  
CONTRAST and PEAKING controls in such a way  
that the color bar signals appear clearly on the  
viewfinder.  
Check that the MENU screen is shown on the  
viewfinder screen and that the item settings can be  
changed by operating the MENU button or JOG  
dial button.  
3
4
Check when the ZEBRA switch is set to ON that  
the zebra pattern appears on the viewfinder  
screen, and check when it is set to OFF that it is  
cleared from the screen.  
9
(Refer to pages 86 to 88 for the menu operations.)  
Set the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch to CAM, and  
select the settings for the CC and ND FILTER  
controls.  
Check that the figures for the FILTER displays on  
the viewfinder screen change to reflect the  
changes in the control positions.  
<Note>  
Depending on the setting statuses, the items and  
functions in steps 3 to 6 may not be displayed or they  
may not operate.  
In a case like this, switch the unit to the engineer  
mode, set DISPLAY MODE on the menu’s VF  
DISPLAY screen to “3,” and set the necessary items  
on the SHUTTER SPEED, !LED and FILM (CAM)  
USER MENU SELECT 1, 2 and 3 screens.  
5Take the following steps, and check that the  
lamp lights when the items set to ON on the !LED  
screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 have been  
operated.  
1. Use the GAIN switch to set the gain to any value  
except 0 dB.  
2. Set the SHUTTER switch to ON.  
3. Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.  
4. Engage the lens extender.  
5. Set the FILTER controls to any setting except B.  
Repeatedly press the SHUTTER switch from ON to  
SEL, and check that the shutter setting changes on  
the viewfinder screen.  
6
Point the lens at any object, and turn the focus ring  
7
to bring the object into focus.  
Check that an image of the object appears on the  
viewfinder.  
133  
Inspections prior to shooting (continued)  
Inspecting the aperture and  
zoom functions  
Inspecting the VTR unit  
Perform all the steps outlined in section “1. Tape  
travel inspection” through section “4. Earphone and  
speaker inspection” one after the other.  
Set the zoom to the motorized zoom mode, and  
1
check its operations in this mode.  
Check that the image changes when the zoom is  
set to the telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
1. Tape travel inspection  
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to SAVE, and  
check that the VTR SAVE lamp inside the  
viewfinder lights.  
1
Set the zoom to the manual zoom mode, and  
check its operations in this mode.  
Turn the manual zoom lever, and check that the  
image changes when the zoom is set to the  
telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
2
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to STBY, and  
check that the VTR SAVE lamp goes off.  
2
Set the aperture to the auto adjustment mode,  
3
Set the TCG switch to R-RUN.  
point the lens at some objects with different  
brightness levels, and check that the auto aperture  
adjustment works.  
3
Set the DISPLAY switch to CTL.  
4
Set the aperture to the manual adjustment mode,  
turn the aperture ring, and check that the manual  
aperture is adjusted.  
4
Press the unit’s VTR START button, and check  
that:  
OThe tape reels rotate.  
5
OThe figure shown on the counter display  
changes.  
OThe REC lamp inside the viewfinder lights.  
OThe RF and SERVO displays do not appear in  
the display window.  
While holding down the auto instantaneous  
5
aperture adjustment button, point the lens at some  
objects with different brightness levels, and check  
that the auto instantaneous aperture adjustment  
function works.  
Press the unit’s VTR START button again. Check  
that the tape stops and the REC lamp inside the  
viewfinder goes off.  
6
Return the aperture to the auto adjustment mode,  
switch the GAIN switch setting to L, M and H, and  
check that:  
6
OThe aperture is adjusted for objects of the same  
brightness level in tandem with the switching of  
the gain setting.  
OThe gain displayed on the viewfinder screen is  
switched in tandem with the switching of the  
gain setting.  
Use the lens VTR button to check the same  
operations as in steps 5 and 6.  
7
Press the RESET button, and check that  
“00:00:00:00” appears on the counter display.  
8
When a lens with an extender has been installed,  
set the extender to the operating position, and  
check that it works properly.  
7
Set the LIGHT switch to ON, and check that the  
display window illuminates.  
9
Press the REW button, and after the tape has  
been rewound for a few seconds, press the  
PLAY/PAUSE button.  
10  
Check that the tape is recorded, played back  
and rewound properly.  
Press the FF button, and check that the tape is  
fast forwarded properly.  
11  
134  
Inspections prior to shooting (continued)  
Inspecting the VTR unit  
5. Inspection using external microphones  
2. Automatic audio level adjustment  
function inspection  
Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN  
CH1 and CH2 jacks.  
1
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to  
REAR.  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switch to  
AUTO.  
2
1
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the  
back panel to MIC or +48V in accordance with the  
external mic’s power supply type.  
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to  
FRONT.  
3
2
MIC : Internal power supply mic.  
+48V : External power supply mic.  
Point the microphone connected to the MIC IN jack  
3
at a suitable sound source, and check that the  
changes in the level displays for both CH1 and  
CH2 reflect the changes in the strength of the  
sound.  
Point the microphones at the sound source, and  
4
check that the changes in the audio levels  
displayed on the audio level meter of the display  
window and in the viewfinder reflect the changes in  
the strength of the sound.  
This inspection can also be performed for each  
channel by connecting one of the microphones to  
each channel in turn.  
3. Manual audio level adjustment function  
inspection  
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to  
FRONT.  
1
6. Inspections relating to the time code  
and user bits  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switch to  
MAN.  
2
Set the user bits as required.  
For details on the setting procedure, refer to  
“Setting the user bits” (page 65).  
1
Turn the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2 controls.  
Check that when they are turned clockwise, the  
level displays increase.  
3
Set the time code.  
For details on the setting procedure, refer to  
“Setting the time code” (page 66).  
2
4. Earphone and speaker inspection  
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to STBY.  
1
2
Set the TCG switch to R-RUN.  
3
4
Turn the MONITOR control, and check that the  
speaker volume changes.  
Press the VTR START button.  
Check that the figure on the counter display  
changes as the tape travels.  
Connect the earphones to the PHONES jack.  
3
Check that the sound from the speaker is muted,  
and that the microphone’s sound is heard in the  
earphones.  
Press the VTR START button again.  
Check that the tape stops and the figure shown on  
the counter display stops changing.  
5
Turn the MONITOR control, and check that the  
earphone volume changes.  
4
Set the TCG switch to F-RUN.  
Check that the figure on the counter display  
changes irrespective of the tape travel.  
6
Set the DISPLAY switch to UB.  
7
Check that the user bits which have been set are  
displayed in the six higher digits in the internal  
color bar signal recording mode.  
135  
Specifications  
[GENERAL]  
[CAMERA UNIT]  
Pickup device:  
2/3-inch, progressive scan CCD (1 million pixels)  
System:  
RGB 3-CCD system  
Total number of pixels:  
1370 (H) a 744 (V)  
Number of effective pixels:  
1280 (H) a 720 (V)  
Quantizing:  
Supply voltage:  
DC 12 V (DC 11 V—DC 17 V)  
Power consumption:  
36 W  
indicates safety information.  
Ambient operating temperature:  
0°C to +40°C (+32°F to +104°F)  
Storage temperature:  
12 bit  
Digital signal processing:  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
74.25 MHz (60.00 Hz)  
Horizontal drive frequency:  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
74.25 MHz (60.00 Hz)  
Sampling frequency:  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
74.25 MHz (60.00 Hz)  
Sensitivity:  
F12 (2000 lx, 3200 K, 89.9% reflection, frame rate:  
23.98 fps, synchro scan: 50%)  
Minimum subject brightness:  
0.7 lx (with F/1.4, +36 dB, 89.9% reflection, frame  
rate: 59.94 fps)  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
Ambient operating humidity:  
Less than 85% (relative humidity)  
Continuous operating time:  
Approx. 150 minutes  
(when using the Anton/Bauer DIONIC90)  
Weight:  
4.7 kg (10.34 lb) (main unit only)  
Approx. 7.4 kg (16.28 lb)  
(including main unit, viewfinder, lens, battery pack,  
tape and microphone)  
Dimensions (WaHaD):  
132 mm a204 mm (excluding grip) a313 mm  
1
1
3
(5 /4 inches a8 /16 inches a12 /8 inches)  
Video S/N ratio:  
54 dB (typ.)  
Horizontal resolution:  
More than 700 TV lines (center)  
Frame rate:  
3.996 fps to 59.94 fps (0.99 fps/step)  
4 fps to 60 fps (1.0 fps/step)  
Shutter speed:  
Preset:  
1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.  
Synchro scan:  
0.8% to 97.2%  
(aperture angle: 3 to 350 degrees, 1/61.7 sec. to  
1/7500 sec.)  
Programmable gain:  
Choice of 3 positions (L/M/H) from –6 dB/–3 dB/  
0 dB/3 dB/6 dB/9 dB/12 dB/18 dB/24 dB/30 dB  
Super gain:  
18 dB/24 dB/30 dB/36 dB selectable  
Built-in filters:  
CC filter:  
A: CROSS, B: 3200 K, C: 4300 K, D: 6300 K  
ND filter:  
1: CLEAR, 2: 1/4 ND, 3: 1/16 ND, 4: 1/64 ND  
Lens mount:  
2/3-inch, Bayonet type  
Optical system:  
F/1.4 prism system  
Registration:  
Less than 0.03% (entire range) (excluding lens  
distortion)  
136  
Specifications (continued)  
[VTR UNIT]  
[Connector Section]  
VTR Tape Transport System  
Input  
Tape used:  
MIC IN (XLR, 3-pin female)  
–40 dBu, Phantom +48 V supported  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (XLRa2, 3-pin female)  
LINE/MIC/MIC+48V switching type  
1/4-inch DVCPRO L-size cassette tape  
Tape speed:  
135.28 mm/s  
(59.94 Hz)  
135.4154 mm/s (60.00 Hz)  
Recording/playback time:  
32 minutes (using AJ-HP32LP)  
FF/REW time:  
LINE  
MIC  
: +4 dBu  
: –60 dBu  
MIC+48V: Phantom +48V, –60 dBu  
GENLOCK IN (BNC):  
Approx. 2.5 minutes (using AJ-HP32LP)  
1.0 Vp-p (tri-level sync pulse: 300 mV), 75 ,  
compliant with SMPTE296M-2001 (1280 a720/60,  
1280 a720/59.94) standard  
VTR Video System  
TC IN (BNC):  
Sampling frequency:  
0.5 —7 Vp-p, high impedance  
Y
: 74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
74.25 MHz (60.00 Hz)  
PB/PR : 37.0879 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
37.125 MHz (60.00 Hz)  
Quantizing:  
Output  
AUDIO OUT (XLR, 5-pin male):  
+4 dBu  
8 bits  
PHONES:  
Video compression system:  
DCT + variable-length code  
Video compression ratio:  
1/6.7  
Stereo mini jack  
HD SDI MON (BNC):  
0.8 Vp-p, 75 Ω  
HD SDI EE (BNC):  
0.8 Vp-p, 75 Ω  
Error correction:  
Reed-Solomon product code  
Video recording bit rate:  
100 Mbps  
TC OUT (BNC):  
2.0 Vp-p, low impedance  
Video band:  
Other  
Y
: 20 MHz  
LENS (12-pin)  
PB/PR : 10 MHz  
ECU (6-pin)  
DC IN (XLR, 4-pin male):  
DC 12 V (DC 11 V—17 V)  
DC OUT (4-pin):  
VTR Audio System  
(during playback on standard player)  
DC 12 V (DC 11 V—17 V), 1.5 A (max.)  
Sampling frequency:  
48.0 kHz (59.94 Hz)  
48.048 kHz (60.00 Hz)  
synchronized with video  
Quantizing:  
EVF (20-pin)  
16 bits  
Frequency response:  
20 Hz to 20 kHz 1.0 dB (at reference level)  
Dynamic range:  
More than 85 dB (at 1 kHz, AWTD)  
Distortion:  
Less than 0.1% (at 1 kHz, reference level)  
Wow and flutter:  
Below measurable limits  
Head room:  
20 dB  
137  
Specifications (continued)  
[VIEWFINDER]  
[RELATED COMPONENTS & PARTS]  
Relating to power supply  
Battery case:  
AU-M402H  
AC adapter:  
(Optional accessory: AJ-HVF27BP)  
CRT:  
2.0-inch high-resolution monochrome tube  
Video system:  
720 lines, 60 fields  
External adjustment controls:  
Controls:  
AJ-B75P  
Viewfinder  
2.0-inch viewfinder:  
AJ-HVF27BP  
BRIGHT, CONTRAST, PEAKING  
Switches:  
TALLY HIGH/OFF/LOW, ZEBRA ON/OFF  
Relating to external VTRs  
Extension control unit:  
AJ-EC3P  
[ACCESSORIES]  
Shoulder strap (a1)  
Battery mount connector (a1)  
Audio components  
Microphone kit:  
AJ-MC700P  
Mic holder:  
AJ-MH800G  
Maintenance products  
Cleaning tape:  
AJ-CL12LP  
Soft carrying case:  
AJ-SC900  
Hard carrying case:  
AJ-HT901G  
Rain cover:  
SHAN-RC700  
Weight and dimensions indicated are approximate.  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
138  
MEMO  
PANASONIC BROADCAST & TELEVISION SYSTEMS COMPANY  
UNIT COMPANY OF PANASONIC CORPORATION OF NORTH AMERICA  
Executive Office:  
One Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7000  
EASTERN ZONE:  
One Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7621  
Southeast Region:  
1225 Northbrook Parkway, Ste 1-160, Suwanee, GA 30024 (770) 338-6835  
Central Region:  
1707 N Randall Road E1-C-1, Elgin, IL 60123 (847) 468-5200  
WESTERN ZONE:  
3330 Cahuenga Blvd W., Los Angeles, CA 90068 (323) 436-3500  
Government Marketing Department:  
52 West Gude Drive, Rockville, MD 20850 (301) 738-3840  
Broadcast PARTS INFORMATION & ORDERING:  
9:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. (EST) (800) 334-4881/24 Hr. Fax (800) 334-4880  
Emergency after hour parts orders (800) 334-4881  
TECHNICAL SUPPORT:  
Emergency 24 Hour Service (800) 222-0741  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3 (905) 624-5010  
Panasonic de Mexico S.A. de C.V.  
Av angel Urraza Num. 1209 Col. de Valle 03100 Mexico, D.F. (52) 1 951 2127  
Panasonic Puerto Rico Inc.  
San Gabriel Industrial Park, 65th Infantry Ave., Km. 9.5, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00630 (787) 750-4300  
© 2005 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.  
P

Philips PV GS55 User Manual
Panasonic WV 7130D User Manual
Laney Amplification Car Amplifier GH100TI User Manual
Konica Minolta MAXXUM 5D User Manual
Kodak GE680 User Manual
Kenwood KVT 696 User Manual
Kenwood KDC 3151M User Manual
Kenwood Car Video System LZ 612IR User Manual
KATA KT A66N User Manual
JVC TK C751 User Manual